Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) › reports › Woxna_PEA_10112013.… · Preliminary Economic...
Transcript of Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) › reports › Woxna_PEA_10112013.… · Preliminary Economic...
Date: 11 October 2013 Document No: 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 1
Woxna Graphite Restart Project
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA)
Prepared For:
Flinders Resources
Compiled By:
GBM Minerals Engineering Consultants
Effective Issue Date:
11 October 2013
Qualified Persons:
Chris Stinton, B Sc, CEng MIMMM Geoffrey Reed, B App Sc, MAusIMM Bryan Pullman, B.Sc.(Eng.), P.Eng APEGA Henning Holmström, M Sc, PhD, MAusIMM
Contributing Engineers:
GBM Minerals Engineering Consultants Limited Reed Leyton Consultants Ltd Golder Associates AB Tailings Consultants Scandinavia
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 2
Revision History
Date Rev Reason Prepared Checked Approved
11/10/13 0 Approved for SEDAR CS/GR/BP/HH CS/IF IF
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................ 18
1.1 Background ............................................................................................................. 18
1.2 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 18
1.3 Reliance on Other Experts ..................................................................................... 18
1.4 Property Description and Location ....................................................................... 18
1.5 Accessibility, Climate, Local Resources, Infrastructure and Physiography .... 19
1.6 History ...................................................................................................................... 19
1.7 Geological Setting and Mineralization .................................................................. 20
1.8 Deposit Types ......................................................................................................... 20
1.9 Exploration .............................................................................................................. 20
1.10 Drilling ...................................................................................................................... 20
1.11 Sample Preparation, Analyses and Security ....................................................... 21
1.12 Data Verification ...................................................................................................... 21
1.13 Mineral Processing and Metallurgical Testing .................................................... 22
1.14 Mineral Resource Estimates .................................................................................. 23
1.15 Mineral Reserve Estimates .................................................................................... 24
1.16 Mining Methods ....................................................................................................... 24
1.17 Recovery Methods .................................................................................................. 29
1.18 Project Infrastructure ............................................................................................. 29
1.19 Market Studies and Contracts ............................................................................... 30
1.20 Environmental Studies, Permitting and Social or Community Impact .............. 31
1.21 Capital and Operating Costs ................................................................................. 32
1.22 Economic Analysis ................................................................................................. 33
1.23 Adjacent Properties ................................................................................................ 33
1.24 Interpretations and Conclusions ........................................................................... 33
1.25 Recommendations .................................................................................................. 34
SECTION 2 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................... 35
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 4
2.1 Client ........................................................................................................................ 35
2.2 Terms of Reference and Purpose ......................................................................... 35
2.3 Sources of Information........................................................................................... 35
SECTION 3 RELIANCE ON OTHER EXPERTS .......................................................................... 36
3.1 Qualified Persons ................................................................................................... 36
3.2 Reliance on Other Experts ..................................................................................... 36
3.3 Verification .............................................................................................................. 37
3.4 Financial Interest Disclaimer ................................................................................. 37
SECTION 4 PROPERTY DESCRIPTION AND LOCATION ........................................................ 38
4.1 Location ................................................................................................................... 38
4.2 Mining Laws and Regulations ............................................................................... 39
4.3 Permits and Concessions ...................................................................................... 41
4.4 Acquisition of Land ................................................................................................ 43
4.5 Taxes and Duties .................................................................................................... 43
4.6 Environmental Considerations .............................................................................. 43
4.7 Flinders’ Property Locations ................................................................................. 44
SECTION 5 ACCESSIBILITY, CLIMATE, LOCAL RESOURCES, INFRASTRUCTURE AND
PHYSIOGRAPHY ..................................................................................................... 45
5.1 Access ..................................................................................................................... 45
5.2 Physiography .......................................................................................................... 45
5.3 Climate ..................................................................................................................... 45
5.4 Water, Power and Telecoms .................................................................................. 46
5.5 Local Resources ..................................................................................................... 46
SECTION 6 HISTORY ................................................................................................................... 48
6.1 Historical Deposit Ownership and Exploration ................................................... 48
6.2 Sampling and Chemical Analysis ......................................................................... 49
6.3 Density Determination ............................................................................................ 49
6.4 Petrology ................................................................................................................. 49
6.5 Historical Mineral Resource Estimates ................................................................ 49
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 5
SECTION 7 GEOLOGICAL SETTING AND MINERALIZATION ................................................. 51
7.1 Regional Geology ................................................................................................... 51
7.2 Local Geology ......................................................................................................... 53
SECTION 8 DEPOSIT TYPES ...................................................................................................... 54
SECTION 9 EXPLORATION......................................................................................................... 57
SECTION 10 DRILLING .................................................................................................................. 59
SECTION 11 SAMPLE PREPARATION, ANALYSES, AND SECURITY ..................................... 64
SECTION 12 DATA VERIFICATION .............................................................................................. 66
12.1 Drill Core .................................................................................................................. 66
12.2 Check Sampling ...................................................................................................... 67
12.3 Check Analyses ...................................................................................................... 69
12.4 Results and Discussion ......................................................................................... 70
12.5 Density ..................................................................................................................... 73
SECTION 13 MINERAL TESTING AND PROCESSING ............................................................... 76
13.1 Recent Test work .................................................................................................... 76
SECTION 14 MINERAL RESOURCE ESTIMATES ....................................................................... 80
14.1 Resource Data ......................................................................................................... 80
14.2 Mineral Resource Estimate .................................................................................... 89
14.3 Discussion ............................................................................................................... 90
14.4 NI 43-101 Compliance ............................................................................................. 90
SECTION 15 MINERAL RESERVE ESTIMATES .......................................................................... 98
SECTION 16 MINING METHODS .................................................................................................. 99
16.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 99
16.2 Geology and Mineral Resources ......................................................................... 101
16.3 Geological Block Model ....................................................................................... 102
16.4 Whittle Optimisation ............................................................................................. 106
16.5 Pit Slope Design Concept .................................................................................... 115
16.6 Open Pit Mining ..................................................................................................... 121
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 6
16.7 Open Pit Mining Operations ................................................................................ 137
16.8 Waste Rock Storage and Management Facility ................................................. 144
16.9 Mining Infrastructures .......................................................................................... 148
SECTION 17 RECOVERY METHODS ......................................................................................... 150
17.1 History and Background ...................................................................................... 150
17.2 Basis for Design .................................................................................................... 150
17.3 Improvements to the Plant ................................................................................... 156
17.4 Basis for the Estimate of Graphite Production .................................................. 157
17.5 Further Beneficiation ............................................................................................ 166
SECTION 18 PROJECT INFRASTRUCTURE ............................................................................. 168
18.1 General ................................................................................................................... 168
18.2 Electrical ................................................................................................................ 170
18.3 Tailings Management Facility (TMF) ................................................................... 173
18.4 Clarification Pond (Lake Uxatjärn) ...................................................................... 176
18.5 Emergency preparedness .................................................................................... 178
18.6 Water Management ............................................................................................... 178
SECTION 19 MARKET STUDIES AND CONTRACTS ................................................................ 179
19.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 179
19.2 Market Description ................................................................................................ 179
19.3 Natural Graphite Demand .................................................................................... 180
19.4 Natural Graphite Supply ....................................................................................... 180
19.5 Natural Graphite Market Price Trends ................................................................ 181
19.6 Pricing Basis for the Woxna Graphite Restart Project ..................................... 183
19.7 Production of Saleable Graphite ......................................................................... 183
SECTION 20 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES, PERMITTING, AND SOCIAL OR COMMUNITY
IMPACT ................................................................................................................... 185
20.1 Environmental Permitting Requirements and Status ....................................... 185
20.2 Further Permits ..................................................................................................... 186
SECTION 21 CAPITAL AND OPERATING COSTS .................................................................... 188
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 7
21.1 Basis of Estimate .................................................................................................. 188
21.2 Capital Cost ........................................................................................................... 192
21.3 Operational Cost ................................................................................................... 198
SECTION 22 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS ......................................................................................... 205
Methodology .......................................................................................................... 205 22.1
22.2 Economic Performance ........................................................................................ 206
22.3 Discounted Cash Flow Analysis ......................................................................... 208
22.4 Sensitivity Analysis .............................................................................................. 209
SECTION 23 ADJACENT PROPERTIES ..................................................................................... 212
SECTION 24 OTHER RELEVANT DATA AND INFORMATION ................................................. 213
24.1 Execution Schedule .............................................................................................. 213
SECTION 25 INTERPRETATION AND CONCLUSIONS ............................................................ 214
25.1 Mineral Resource Estimates ................................................................................ 214
25.2 Mining Methods ..................................................................................................... 214
25.3 Metallurgical Test Work and Processing ........................................................... 215
25.4 Organisational Structure ...................................................................................... 215
25.5 Tailings Refurbishment and Expansion ............................................................. 215
25.6 Production and Graphite Sale ............................................................................. 216
25.7 Infrastructure ......................................................................................................... 216
25.8 Financial Performance ......................................................................................... 216
25.9 Risks and Opportunities ...................................................................................... 217
SECTION 26 RECOMMENDATIONS ........................................................................................... 220
26.1 Mineral Resource and Reserve Estimates ......................................................... 220
26.2 Metallurgical Test Work ....................................................................................... 220
26.3 Mining .................................................................................................................... 221
26.4 Processing ............................................................................................................. 222
26.5 Organisational Structure ...................................................................................... 222
26.6 Tailings .................................................................................................................. 223
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 8
26.7 Production and Graphite Sale ............................................................................. 223
SECTION 27 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................ 224
APPENDIX A LOM Schedule........................................................................................................ 226
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 9
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1: Results of the Locked Cycle Flotation Tests ....................................................................... 23
Table 1-2: Expected Product Tonnages and Recovery ........................................................................ 23
Table 1-3: Resource Grade and Tonnage (at 7% Cg cut-off grade) .................................................... 24
Table 1-4: Golder Selection of Whittle Pit Shell for Kringelgruvan Deposit Ultimate Open Pit ............. 25
Table 1-5: Materials Contained in Pits .................................................................................................. 26
Table 1-6: Production Schedule Summary ........................................................................................... 27
Table 1-8: Initial Capital Cost (M USD) ................................................................................................. 32
Table 1-9: Operating Cost Summary .................................................................................................... 32
Table 1-10 - Summary Economic Analysis ........................................................................................... 33
Table 4-1: Woxna Graphite Project Tenure .......................................................................................... 39
Table 4-2: Woxna Graphite Project – Kringelgruvan nr 1 Mining Concession Co-ordinates ................ 44
Table 6-1: Drilling History of the Kringelgruvan Project ........................................................................ 48
Table 6-2: Woxna Graphite Project Historical Resources (after Claesson, 2002) ................................ 49
Table 9-1: Flinders Drilling of the Kringelgruvan Project ...................................................................... 58
Table 10-1: Kringelgruvan Drill Collar Co-ordinates (SWEREF99 TM Grid) ........................................ 60
Table 12-1: Drillholes and Core Examined by Reed Leyton Representative ....................................... 66
Table 12-2: Check Sample Intervals by Reed Leyton Representative ................................................. 67
Table 12-3: Drill Core Re-sampled for Check Analysis, Matched with Original Assays ....................... 70
Table 13-1: Results of the Locked Cycle Flotation Tests ..................................................................... 78
Table 14-1: Kringelgruvan Drilling Database Summary ........................................................................ 81
Table 14-2: Kringelgruvan ‘hg’ Domain (above 7 % Cg) and ‘grf’ Domain (lith code FGRF) .............. 85
Table 14-3: Kringelgruvan Domain Volume Validation ......................................................................... 85
Table 14-4: Block Model Parameters for Kringelgruvan ....................................................................... 87
Table 14-5: Search Parameters for Kringelgruvan ............................................................................... 88
Table 14-6: Estimation Parameters for Kringelgruvan .......................................................................... 88
Table 14-7: Kringelgruvan Mineral Resource Estimate @ 7 % Cut-Off ................................................ 89
Table 14-7: Kringelgruvan Mineral Resource Estimate @ 7 % Cut-Off ................................................ 89
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 10
Table 14-8: Kringelgruvan Graphite Combined Resource Grade and Cumulative Tonnage at Various
Cut-Off Grades ...................................................................................................................................... 90
Table 14-9: Kringelgruvan – Drill holes and Intervals Used in Resource Calculation .......................... 90
Table 16-1: Pit Optimisation Parameters ............................................................................................ 100
Table 16-2: Kringelgruvan Deposit 2013 Mineral Resource Estimate ................................................ 101
Table 16-3: Density by Material Type in Geological Block Model “vie_voxna_2013apr_75.csv” ....... 103
Table 16-4: Kringelgruvan Geological Block Model Parameters ........................................................ 103
Table 16-5: Geological Block Model Key Variables ............................................................................ 104
Table 16-6: Kringelgruvan Geological Model In-situ Tonnes and Grade ............................................ 104
Table 16-7: Kringelgruvan Geological Model In-situ Tonnes and Grade Using a 7 % cut-off Grade . 104
Table 16-8: Kringelgruvan Geological Model In-situ Tonnes and Grade Per Mineral Type ............... 105
Table 16-9: Topography and Geological Boundaries ......................................................................... 105
Table 16-10: Kringelgruvan Datamine Geological Model Tonnes and Grade (no cut-off applied) ..... 106
Table 16-11: Optimisation Block Model Tonnes ................................................................................. 107
Table 16-13: Kringelgruvan Whittle Pit by Pit Summary of Results .................................................... 111
Table 16-14: Selected Pit Shell and Whittle Results for Kringelgruvan Deposit ................................. 114
Table 16-15: Open Pit Design Parameters ......................................................................................... 122
Table 16-16: Summary of Total In-pit Resources ............................................................................... 125
Table 16-17: Summary of the Year 1 - 2 Production Schedule .......................................................... 128
Table 16-19: Kringelgruvan 10 Year Mine Production Schedule ........................................................ 133
Table 16-20: Kringelgruvan LOM Production Summary ..................................................................... 135
Table 16-23: Preliminary Mine Equipment List ................................................................................... 142
Table 16-24: Mining Workforce Estimate ............................................................................................ 142
Table 16-25: Estimated Mine Staffing Requirement ........................................................................... 143
Table 17-1: Crushing Criteria .............................................................................................................. 157
Table 17-2: Fine Ore Bin Parameters ................................................................................................. 157
Table 17-3: Primary Milling Criteria .................................................................................................... 158
Table 17-4: Flash Flotation Criteria ..................................................................................................... 158
Table 17-5: Rougher Flotation Criteria ................................................................................................ 159
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 11
Table 17-6: Scavenger 1 Flotation Criteria ......................................................................................... 159
Table 17-7: Scavenger 2 Flotation Criteria ......................................................................................... 159
Table 17-8: Scavenger Cleaner 1 Flotation Criteria ........................................................................... 159
Table 17-9: Scavenger Cleaner 2 Flotation Criteria ........................................................................... 160
Table 17-10: Scavenger Cleaner 3 Flotation Criteria ......................................................................... 160
Table 17-11: Rougher Cleaner 1 Flotation Criteria ............................................................................. 160
Table 17-12: Rougher Cleaner 2 Flotation Criteria ............................................................................. 160
Table 17-13: Regrind Mill Criteria (all SMD’s) ..................................................................................... 161
Table 17-14: Concentrate Dewatering Criteria ................................................................................... 161
Table 17-15: Bagging Plant ................................................................................................................. 161
Table 17-16: Flotation Reagent Requirements ................................................................................... 161
Table 17-17: Screen Analysis of Concentrates of the Locked Cycle Test .......................................... 163
Table 17-18: Summary of Available Production Reports Year 2000 .................................................. 164
Table 17-19: Coarse Flake Production Specification .......................................................................... 164
Table 17-20: Medium Flake Production Specification ....................................................................... 165
Table 17-21: Fine Flake Production Specification .............................................................................. 165
Table 19-1: Average Sale Price Estimation ........................................................................................ 183
Table 20-1: Woxna Graphite Project Tenure ...................................................................................... 186
Table 21-1: Operating Inputs .............................................................................................................. 188
Table 21-2: Supporting Documents .................................................................................................... 188
Table 21-3: Project Area Breakdown .................................................................................................. 189
Table 21-4: Currency Exchange Rate ................................................................................................. 190
Table 21-5: Initial Capital Cost (M USD) ............................................................................................. 193
Table 21-6: Direct Cost Centre Factors .............................................................................................. 195
Table 21-7: Indirect Cost Centre Definitions ....................................................................................... 196
Table 21-8 - Indirect Cost Factors ...................................................................................................... 197
Table 21-9: Deferred Capital Investment ............................................................................................ 197
Table 21-10: Operational Costs .......................................................................................................... 198
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 12
Table 21-11: Summary of Contractor Operating Costs ...................................................................... 200
Table 21-12: Summary Power Requirements ..................................................................................... 203
Table 22-1: Depreciation and Loss Parameters ................................................................................. 205
Table 22-2: Base case financial inputs ............................................................................................... 205
Table 22-3: Historical Book Assets ..................................................................................................... 206
Table 22-4: Economics Summary ....................................................................................................... 206
Table 22-5: Discounted Cash Flow Analysis ...................................................................................... 208
Table 22-6: Sensitivity Analysis Results ............................................................................................. 209
Table 24-1: Indicative Execution Schedule ......................................................................................... 213
Table 26-1: Indicative Resource Development Costs ......................................................................... 220
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 13
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1: Pit Designs .......................................................................................................................... 26
Figure 1-2: LOM Production Schedule .................................................................................................. 27
Figure 1-3: Final Status Map of the Site ............................................................................................... 28
Figure 4-1: Location of Flinders Resources Graphite Projects, Sweden .............................................. 38
Figure 5-1: Topography and Access of the Kringelgruvan Project Area .............................................. 47
Figure 7-1: Regional Geology of the Kringelgruvan Project Area ......................................................... 52
Figure 7-2: Local Geology of the Kringelgruvan Project Area .............................................................. 53
Figure 8-1: Graphite Mineralisation of the Kringelgruvan Project Area ................................................ 55
Figure 8-2: Graphite Mineralisation of the Kringelgruvan Project Area ................................................ 56
Figure 10-1: Drilling at the Kringelgruvan Project Area ........................................................................ 60
Figure 12-1: Coarse Duplicate Data for Cg ........................................................................................... 70
Figure 12-2: Pulp Duplicate Data for Cg ............................................................................................... 70
Figure 12-3: Paired Historical and Modern Analytical Data for Cg ....................................................... 73
Figure 12-4: All 1 424 Bulk Density Determinations ............................................................................. 74
Figure 12-5: Domain ‘HG’ 376 Bulk Density Determinations ................................................................ 74
Figure 12-6: Domain ‘GRF’ 540 Bulk Density Determinations .............................................................. 75
Figure 13-1: Locked Cycle Flotation Test Diagram .............................................................................. 79
Figure 14-1: Histogram of Raw Sample Lengths for Kringelgruvan ..................................................... 83
Figure 14-2: Mineral Resource Cross Section, Kringelgruvan .............................................................. 84
Figure 14-3: Mineral Resource Cross Section, Kringelgruvan .............................................................. 86
Figure 16-1: Screenshot of Imported Whittle Block Models Summary for Kringelgruvan .................. 108
Figure 16-2: Whittle Resultant Pits (RF 0.85 – Magenta, RF 1.0 – Blue) ........................................... 112
Figure 16-3: Graph of Kringelgruvan Graphite and Waste Tonnage Versus Revenue Factor and
Discounted Net Value ......................................................................................................................... 112
Figure 16-4: Kringelgruvan Graph of Results Pit Discounted Net Value and Tonnes of Graphite by
Revenue Factor ................................................................................................................................... 113
Figure 16-5: Kringelgruvan Spider Graph Sensitivity of Pit Value to Variance of Costs and Graphite
Price .................................................................................................................................................... 114
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 14
Figure 16-6: Kringelgruvan RF 1.0 Whittle Pits................................................................................... 115
Figure 16-7: Inter-relationships Between Bench Geometry, Inter-ramp Slope Angle, and the Overall
Slope Angle (Wyllie & Mah, 2004) ...................................................................................................... 116
Figure 16-8: Catch Bench Geometry (originally from Call, 1986) (Kuchta & Hustrulid, 2006) ........... 117
Figure 16-9: Ovanakers Kommun Overview Map ............................................................................... 119
Figure 16-10: Final Kringelgruvan Pit Designs ................................................................................... 122
Figure 16-11: Final Pit Designs Compared with the RF 1.0 Whittle Shells ........................................ 123
Figure 16-12: Comparison of the Final Pit Design with the RF1.0 Whittle Shell (207.5 m Elevation) in
Plan ..................................................................................................................................................... 124
Figure 16-13: Comparison of the Final Pit Design on Section (as labelled) ...................................... 125
Figure 16-14: Distribution of Tonnage by Bench in the West (left) and East (right) Pit Designs ........ 126
Figure 16-15: RF 0.7 Whittle Shells Used as the Starting Point for Mining in the East and West Pits
............................................................................................................................................................ 127
Figure 16-16: Kringelgruvan Status Map – Up to End of Year 2 ........................................................ 127
Figure 16-17: Kringelgruvan 2 Year Mining Schedule ........................................................................ 128
Figure 16-18: End of Year 1 Status Map ............................................................................................ 129
Figure 16-19: End of Year 2 Status Map ............................................................................................ 130
Figure 16-20: Kringelgruvan Production Schedule to Year 3 ............................................................. 131
Figure 16-21: End of Year 3 Status Map ............................................................................................ 132
Figure 16-22: Kringelgruvan 10 Year Production Schedule ............................................................... 133
Figure 16-23: End of Year 10 Status Map .......................................................................................... 134
Figure 16-24: Kringelgruvan LOM Schedule ....................................................................................... 135
Figure 16-25: End of Mine Status Map ............................................................................................... 136
Figure 16-26: Site Overview ................................................................................................................ 136
Figure 16-27: Open Pit Drill and Blast Geometry (courtesy of DynoNobel.com) ................................ 137
Figure 16-28: Typical Blast Pattern Design ........................................................................................ 139
Figure 16-29: Woxna Graphite Mine Technical Services Department Organogram .......................... 144
Figure 16-30: Location of the Waste Storage Area ............................................................................ 148
Figure 16-31: Power Line and Pit Interaction ...................................................................................... 149
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 15
Figure 17-1: Process Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 151
Figure 18-1: Processing Plant the Woxna Project Area ..................................................................... 168
Figure 18-2: Open Pit at the Woxna Project Area .............................................................................. 168
Figure 18-3: Tailings and Water Management at Woxna ................................................................... 174
Figure 18-4: Upstream Tailings Dam .................................................................................................. 175
Figure 18-5: Clarification Pond Expansion .......................................................................................... 177
Figure 18-6: Water Conditioning Plant ................................................................................................ 177
Figure 19-1: European Average Price of Natural Graphite by Type from 2003 to 2012 (USD/t) - (2) 182
Figure 19-2: European Average Price of Medium Size Flake Graphite by Grade from 2003 to 2012
(USD/t) - (2) ......................................................................................................................................... 182
Figure 21-1: Plant Operating Cost Proportions ................................................................................... 200
Figure 21-2: Proposed Organisational Chart ...................................................................................... 202
Figure 22-1: Sensitivity Analysis ......................................................................................................... 211
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 16
NOMENCLATURE
Abbreviation/Acronym Meaning
% Percentage
° Degree
ABA Acid Base Accounting
AP Acid Potential
ARD Acid Rock Drainage
Cg Carbon graphite
CSV Comma-separated values file format
g Grams
gpm Gallon Per Minute
g/t Grams/tonne or ppm
GBM GBM Minerals Engineering Consultants Limited
Golder Golder Associates AB
GPa Gigapascal
kg Kilograms
km Kilometres
kN Kilonewton
kW Kilowatt
LCM Loose Cubic Meters
LG Lerchs-Grossmann
LOM Life-of-Mine
m Metres
M Million
m³ Cubic metres
MOU Memorandum of Understanding
MPa Megapascal
MPA Neutralization Potential
Mt Million tonnes
M tonnes Millions of Metric tonnes
NP Acid Consumption
NPR Neutralization Potential Ratio calculation
Opex Operating expenses
Pa Pascal
PEM Potentially Economic Material
t/a Tonnes per annum
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 17
Abbreviation/Acronym Meaning
p/a Per annum
h/a Hours per annum
d/a Days per annum
PEA Preliminary Economic Analysis
ppm Parts per million
RF Revenue Factor
RL Relative Level
ROM Run-of-Mine
ROMt Run-of-Mine tonne
RT90 Grid system RT 90 2.5 gon V 0:-15 (Rikets nät)
SWEREF99TM Swedish Reference frame 1999
SEK Swedish krona
Tonnes Metric tonnes
tpd Tonnes per day
USD United States Dollar
Woxna Woxna Graphite AB
WSM World Stress Map
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 18
SECTION 1 SUMMARY
1.1 BACKGROUND
The Woxna Graphite Restart Project (the Project) consists of a partially depleted graphite mine,
graphite processing plant, related infrastructure, 4 mining concessions covering graphite deposits and
numerous adjoining exploration concessions located nearby the town of Edsbyn in the Ovanåker
Municipality, Gävleborg County, in the Kingdom of Sweden. The Project is owned by Woxna Graphite
AB (Woxna), which is 100 % owned by Flinders Resources Ltd (“Flinders”).
The Woxna mine operated from 1996 to 2001, when production was halted due to falling graphite
prices. Since then the site has been held on care and maintenance.
Graphite prices have strengthened since 2009 and today are approximately double the prices when
the Woxna mine last operated. The purpose of this report is to assess the preliminary economic
potential of restarting the Project. This Preliminary Economic Assessment (“PEA”) has been
completed with an accuracy of ± 30 %.
1.2 INTRODUCTION
GBM Minerals Engineering Consultants Ltd. (“GBM”) has been contracted by Flinders to undertake a
Preliminary Economic Assessment (PEA). The purpose of this PEA is to assemble contributions from
GBM and Woxna’s other appointed contractors, to estimate the capital cost of the restarting graphite
production at Woxna, operating costs and revenue to general financial analysis to assist the Flinders
Board to consider whether to restart the Woxna mine. The PEA is to an accuracy of ± 30 %.
1.3 RELIANCE ON OTHER EXPERTS
In compiling the PEA, GBM reviewed and relied on expert’s opinions, Qualified Persons statements
and Specialist Consultants reports and for information beyond their area of technical expertise.
Information has been provided by the Client and various sub-contractors, including Amelunxen
Mineral Processing Ltd (Aminpro), Golder Associates (Golder), Reed Leyton Consulting (Reed
Leyton), Tailings Consultants Scandinavia (TCS), Flinders Resources and Woxna Graphite AB.
1.4 PROPERTY DESCRIPTION AND LOCATION
The Woxna graphite project is located at 61°24'36.49"N and 15°37'03.28"E, some 10 km WNW of the
town of Edsbyn in the Ovanåker Municipality, Gävleborg County, in the Kingdom of Sweden. It
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 19
consists of four separate issued mining concessions each securing a graphite deposit, totalling
146.71 ha.
The Woxna mine site is located on the Kringelgruvan nr 1 mining concession which is the key project
area and the subject of this report. At Woxna there is a processing plant, a tailings facility, office
infrastructure and power and water services exist next to a partially exploited open pit. The company
appears to have all the necessary rights, permits and licences validly granted to access the
properties, conduct exploration activities and mine and process graphite at Woxna.
Three other mining concessions, Gropabo, Mattsmyra and Mansberg contain historic graphite
resources only are undeveloped and are not evaluated in this report
1.5 ACCESSIBILITY, CLIMATE, LOCAL RESOURCES, INFRASTRUCTURE AND
PHYSIOGRAPHY
The Project is accessible via 9.5 km of unsealed all-weather forestry roads from tarred Route 301.
The climate is comparatively temperate, considering Sweden’s northern latitude. The climate is typical
of Fennoscandia with cool summers and cold winters. At Edsbyn, some 10 km to the south west of
the project area, the monthly average minimum temperature ranges from -8 °C to +11 °C and the
range of average maximum monthly temperatures is -1 °C to +23 °C. Edsbyn receives 30 mm to 70
mm of precipitation per month with autumn and winter typically drier than the spring and summer.
Mining and processing operate all year round, with possible short and minor disruptions during winter
storms as a result of snowfall and very low temperatures.
Connected grid power, water and conventional telecoms are available at the Project. Mobile
telephone services are widely available.
Local services, in terms of machine and engineering plant maintenance, are available in Edsbyn.
Road, rail and service infrastructure is well developed. Sweden has a long history of mining and local
and specialised labour is widely available.
1.6 HISTORY
The Kringelgruvan mineralization was discovered in 1986 and subsequent trenching and drilling
programmes were carried out between 1987 and 1988. Mining leases and permits were obtained
allowing mine and processing plant construction between 1993 and 1995. Production began in 1996
and continued until 2001 when the project closed down because of declining graphite prices.
Historical mineral resource estimates were available, which together with information from drilling
conducted in 2012 was used by Reed Leyton to calculate the NI 43-101 resource estimates published
in 2012 and updated in this report.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 20
1.7 GEOLOGICAL SETTING AND MINERALIZATION
The geology of Sweden consists of three main components: Precambrian crystalline rocks, the
remnants of a younger sedimentary rock cover, and rocks of Caledonian Orogen (490 Ma – 390 Ma).
The Kringelgruvan claim shows development of trace to massive graphite in metasedimentary and
metavolcanic host rocks which have been metamorphosed to sillimanite grade and intruded by felsic
units ranging from alkali pegmatite to granite.
The geology is dominated by steeply-dipping, calcareous quartz-rich meta-tuff, with interbedded
metasedimentary units and cross-cutting pegmatite.
1.8 DEPOSIT TYPES
The dominant graphite rock association at Woxna is contact metasomatic or hydrothermal deposits in
metamorphosed calcareous sedimentary or volcaniclastic protoliths, associated with prominent
pegmatite intrusions that are interpreted to be the heat source during contact metamorphism. The
pegmatite intrusions comprise quartz, orthoclase and phlogopite and intrude a metamorphosed,
highly strained stratigraphic succession dominated by sedimentary and volcaniclastic protolithologies,
which have undergone later brittle fracturing.
The graphite deposits occur beneath a thin blanket of Quaternary age moraine deposits. The
graphite and minor associated pyrrhotite are excellent conductors that allow for prospecting using
geophysical methods.
1.9 EXPLORATION
Exploration in the early 1980s proceeded under the direction of the Swedish Geological Survey and
subsequently by MIRAB (Mineral Resources AB), a Swedish exploration company, following their
acquisition of the exploration and mining leases from the Swedish State in 1992. A variety of
techniques were used to determine the mineralogy, including magnetic, radiometric and
electromagnetic methods. Follow-up diamond drilling took place during 1988-1989 and by Flinders in
2012.
1.10 DRILLING
Between 1988 and 1989 a total of 2 908 m of diamond core was drilled on the Kringelgruvan mining
concession, comprising 51 diamond drill holes (35 mm core size). The historic program resulted in
374 graphite analyses (carbon by Leco analyser).
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 21
In 2012 drilling was conducted Flinders. A total of 41 holes comprising 3 673 m of diamond core were
drilled. The program resulted in 1 345 graphite analyses (carbon by Leco analyser).
All remnant drill core, after sampling, is stored in boxes at the Kringelgruvan project.
1.11 SAMPLE PREPARATION, ANALYSES AND SECURITY
Historical sample preparation methods and quality control measures employed before dispatch of
samples to an analytical or testing laboratory have not been documented, nor the method or process
of sample splitting and reduction, nor the security measures taken to ensure the validity and integrity
of samples taken.
At Kringelgruvan, 374 valid carbon and 52 valid sulphur analyses are presented in both paper and
database (.dbf) format. The laboratory that completed analysis of the Kringelgruvan samples was the
Government owned SGAB ANALYS, (Box 801, Luleå, Sweden 95128).
The laboratories that carried out the sampling and analytical work are independent of the Woxna and
previous project vendors. No details of certification by any standards associations and the particulars
of any certification are known, however the laboratory was well regarded and applied best practice of
the day.
1.12 DATA VERIFICATION
The adequacy, archiving and standard of the data presented is of sufficient quality for the reporting,
subject to qualification, of the historical drilling and resources as presented by previous project
owners.
Where possible, Flinders Resources Ltd has surveyed all drill collars by DGPS. The exception is the
drill collars now located in the bounds of the pit which were removed during mining. Position for these
drill holes has been calculated by converting the historic local grid into coordinates of RT90 and are
assumed accurate. The RT90 coordinates were further converted into SWEREF 99 TM by Tyréns in
January 2013.
Coffey Mining had transcribed paper records for collar, assay, survey and geology data, as reported
by Claesson et al. (1991, 1992, 1993), for Kringelgruvan and compared these to digital data available
to the issuer. Coffey Mining concluded that the historical data is of sufficient quality and traceable
provenance that it is useable as exploration data. The then supervising geologist, who is a QP under
current NI 43-101 protocol, also verified the provenance of the data supplied.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 22
1.13 MINERAL PROCESSING AND METALLURGICAL TESTING
After reviewing historical testwork and production reports including grades and size analyses of the
graphite concentrates sold, it was decided that further test work was required to assess whether it is
possible to improve the grade and increase the flake size of the graphite products produced thereby
yielding higher prices for those products.
Outotec was commissioned to complete concentrate dewatering test work in 2012 to support the
dewatering plant design. The results indicate that thickening is not viable and that pressure filtration
yields a filter cake moisture content of 22 %.
Amelunxen Mineral Processing Ltd (Aminpro) was commissioned to complete a comprehensive test
work investigation programme with the objectives of increasing the coarse flake recovery, overall
plant recovery and product grade (1).
The test work samples for the Aminpro test work were a combination of bulk hand samples and drill
core. Intervals of drill core were selected by Monte Carlo method to represent the mineralised body.
Rougher tests were carried out on these 20 intervals, and ten of these had mineralogy carried out on
them. In addition, the work index for each sample was estimated. The remaining flotation test work
was completed with a composite sample of high and low grade hand samples with a grade of 9 % C,
and another bulk hand sample with a grade of 12 % C.
The comminution results included:
Bond Work Index of the feed was 18.5 kWh/t.
Assessment of regrinding parameters for flotation cleaner concentrate resulted in Bond
Work Index greater than 40 kWh/t (grade dependent).
Rougher flotation was tested at varying grind sizes using MIBC as the sole collector. The following
was observed:
Graphite and gangue (silicates) are the coarsest components of the material with iron
sulphides (mainly pyrrhotite) being present as fines.
Graphite floated rapidly with good recoveries (>95 %) in all tests. Gangue and iron sulphides
had lower recoveries and flotation speeds.
Flash flotation in roughers should be considered to capture as coarse a flake product as
possible and that the finer graphite would be recovered in the scavengers.
The following conclusions were reached for the cleaner flotation:
The major gangue mineral in the concentrates is muscovite
Regrinding was necessary to achieve higher grades.
Flotation at low densities was important.
Use of dispersants was seen to help depression of gangue.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 23
Concentrate grades in the above 90 % carbon were achieved in a number of tests aimed at
developing the cleaner circuit configuration, at the optimised conditions.
A locked cycle test was performed at optimised flotation conditions. The overall graphite recovery
obtained was above 96 % C. The assay results of the tests with size are shown in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1: Results of the Locked Cycle Flotation Tests
Size fraction µm
Rougher cleaners concentrate
Rougher-scavenger cleaners concentrate
Combine concentrate
% retained % C % retained % C % retained % C
+250 13.9 95 22.0 95 18.4 95
+180 -250 18.8 97 23.4 92 21.4 94
+100 -180 26.5 94 29.6 91 28.3 92
-100 40.8 89 25.0 87 31.9 88
The locked cycle test results were used to calculate the expected product tonnages, based on mill
throughput of 155 000 t/a, as shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2: Expected Product Tonnages and Recovery
Graphite Product Flake size Grade (% C)
Mass Pull (%)
Product Tonnage
(t/a)
Recovery (%)
Premium Concentrate > 250 μm 95 % 18 % 2 990 18.3 %
Coarse Concentrate 180 to 250 μm 94 % 22 % 3 650 21.1 %
Medium Concentrate 100 to 180 μm 92 % 28 % 4 650 27.3 %
Fine Concentrate < 100 μm 88 % 32 % 5 310 29.4 %
Total 100 % 16 600 96.0 %
1.14 MINERAL RESOURCE ESTIMATES
Reed Leyton Consulting reviewed the historic mineral resources available and conducted necessary
inspections. The Kringelgruvan Mineral Resource describes four main bodies of mineralization
separated by faulting drilled within an area approximately 1 200 m x 100 m to 200 m.
Following an audit of historical data, Flinders data, the compiled Flinders drilling database, and the
subsequent calculation of Mineral Resources, the quoted Mineral Resources at Kringelgruvan were
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 24
subdivided into CIM-compliant measured and indicated categories on the basis of the close density of
drilling, checked grades and inter-hole continuity.
Table 1-3: Resource Grade and Tonnage (at 7% Cg cut-off grade)
Classification Tonnes (Mt) Grade (Cg)
Measured 1.0 10.7
Indicated 1.8 10.7
Total 2.8 10.7
A relative density value of 2.7 t/m3 was run according to density test work by the Woxna previously
attributed to various assays within the geology database. Two block models were constructed and
wire framing of the geological boundaries was performed using the available drill hole data. A cut-off
grade of 7 % graphite has been applied as base case to the Mineral Resource estimation.
1.15 MINERAL RESERVE ESTIMATES
There are no NI 43-101 mineral reserve estimates available to, or commissioned by, Woxna.
1.16 MINING METHODS
Golder Associates AB (Golder) undertook the mining section of the Preliminary Economic Analysis
(PEA) Woxna Graphite Restart Project in Central Sweden. Pit optimisation, pit design and mine
production schedules were performed using industry standard Gemcom Whittle™ 4x optimisation
software, Maptek Vulcan™ and Gemcom Surpac™ mine planning software. Inputs into the design
and schedule included a block model, prices and costs along with mining and geotechnical factors.
The block model and economic parameters were supplied by Woxna Graphite AB (Woxna) and GBM
Minerals Engineering Consultants Limited (GBM) respectively to Golder.
Open pit optimisation was run on Kringelgruvan deposit and for the purpose of this study the
optimisation included only graphite under Measured and Indicated mineral resources categories
within the provided resource model. The model produced a volume of Potentially Economic
Mineralisation (PEM) and waste tonnes, distributed over the life of the mine. The following table is the
summary of the optimisation.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 25
Table 1-4: Golder Selection of Whittle Pit Shell for Kringelgruvan Deposit Ultimate Open Pit
Pit Number Revenue
Factor
Discounted Net Cashflow
(USD M)
PEM Processed
(Mt includes dilution)
Waste
(Mt)
Cut-off C
(%)
11 1.00 19.6 1.9 10.8 7.0
The RF 1.0 shell was then used to generate operational, or smooth, pit designs. Two distinct open
pits were designed around the Whittle shells. The pits included haulage ramps located on the south
wall of the pits and tied into the existing haul road network on the site.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 26
Table 1-5: Materials Contained in Pits
Source Tonnes PEM Grade Graphite Waste Tonnes Total Tonnes Waste: PEM Ratio
East Pit 889 706 10.54 3 757 246 4 826 380 4.42
West Pit 927 780 11.40 5 690 513 6 618 293 6.13
Total Inventory 1 817 486 10.98 9 627 187 11 444 673 5.30
Figure 1-1: Pit Designs
The pits were then scheduled over the Life-of-Mine (LOM) by months for the first year, quarters for
years 2 and 3 and then annually for the remainder of the life of the project. The schedules were
charted for every operating year and reported for years 1, 2, 3, 10 and at the conclusion of mining.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 27
Figure 1-2: LOM Production Schedule
The cumulative LOM production totals for the reporting periods are summarised in the following table.
Production of 100 000 t/a was achieved over the life of the project. The waste to PEM ratio increases
over time due to the depth of the pits and designed strip ratios until the final years when the benches
are predominantly PEM. The Graphite total in the table below is the recovered mill product from the
processing facility with a recovery rate of 85 % of the Run-of-Mine (ROM) feed grade.
Table 1-6: Production Schedule Summary
Item Units Year 1-2 Total Year 3 Total Year 10 Total LOM TOTAL
Waste tonne Tonne 798 483 1 309 319 5 558 148 9 598 843
Overburden Tonne 17 879 26 432 85 316 826 173
Strip ratio (waste:ROM)
Tonne 4.0 4.4 5.6 5.1
ROM tonne Tonne 200 000 300 000 1 000 000 1 898 739
Graphite Tonne 17 630 26 183 84 879 166 229
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 28
Figure 1-3: Final Status Map of the Site
The waste dump was designed in 10 m lifts from 235 m to 315 m and rises at a nominal rate of
approximately 5 m p/a.
The waste rock was characterised into two types; A and B. Type A was characterised as neutralising
and suitable for tailings dam and construction materials. Type B waste was determined to be acid
generating and unsuitable for construction materials. Type B waste was to be stored in an engineered
waste storage area. The study planning did not segregate these materials and assumed that all
waste materials would report to the waste dump.
The tailings reported to the existing tailings storage facility north east of the process plant and mining
areas. The mine production plan produces a total of 1.8 M tonnes of tailings solids. Golder estimated
the total water required to be an additional 50 % to the PEM processed for a total of 2.6 M tonnes of
pumped tailings over the life of the mine.
The mine operating costs were derived from contractor quotations obtained by Golder. A base rate of
48 SEK/t was used for graphite mining.
For the purposes of economic modelling, the Plant throughput is assumed to be 0.155 Mt/a ROM
tonnes, and the mine production schedule was accelerated on a pro rata basis accordingly. Checks
were completed to verify the validity of this, and other differences in final optimisation parameters and
Golder are satisfied that the PEA level mine design would not materially change. The mining study
determined that the Kringelgruvan deposit could be technically feasibly exploited over a production
period of 19 years from 2 adjacent open pit mines. Golder are satisfied that this statement remains
315 m
180 m 170 m
170 m
200 m 190 m
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 29
true under the final recovery, throughput and price parameters used in the economics for a PEA level
report.
Through the execution of the project Golder developed an array of recommendations to progress the
Woxna Graphite Project.
1.17 RECOVERY METHODS
The Woxna project has an existing graphite processing plant which was last fully operated in 2001. A
comprehensive metallurgical test work programme by Aminpro led to a new process flow sheet
designed by Aminpro and GBM. This flow sheet predicts a significant improvement in quantity, grade
and graphite flake size distribution compared to historic production. Engineering under the PEA
proposes utilising as much of the existing facilities and infrastructure as possible in line with the new
design, to minimise the initial capital cost and enable production to commence in the shortest possible
time.
The process flow sheet incorporates conventional mineral processing technology starting with 2 stage
crushing of the ROM material followed by grinding in the existing rod mill. The ground product is
treated by flash and rougher flotation to maximise the recovery of large flake. The rougher tailings are
treated in a scavenger flotation circuit to maximise recovery. The flash and rougher concentrates
then undergo 2 stages of regrinding and cleaner flotation while scavenger concentrate has 3 stages of
regrinding and cleaner flotation. Most of the flotation section uses new equipment. Graphite
concentrate is dewatered in a new filter press then dried in the existing drier. Screening and packing
of graphite product largely utilises existing equipment. A new flake product exceeding 250 micron and
94 % purity is produced in addition to the graphite grades produced historically.
The nominal throughput of the plant is 155 000 t/a based on the maximum rate that can be milled in
the existing rod mill. There is potential to significantly increase throughput by using an existing re-
grinding mill as a ball mill in the primary milling circuit along with commensurate expansions of the
flotation, drying, screening and packing sections. An expansion of capacity would be considered once
markets permit.
1.18 PROJECT INFRASTRUCTURE
The mine site has a partially depleted existing open pit, tailings management facility (TMF), waste
rock dump areas, mine site roads, clarification ponds and processing facility under care-and-
maintenance within the Kringelgruvan mining concession. Infrastructure such as power, water, road
access, telephone, mobile network coverage and internet connection are connected and satisfactory
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 30
The mine shares approximately 9.5 km of gravel forestry road, from national Route 301 to the site
gate. The mine is in a cooperative with the local community that live along the road and contribute to
its upkeep. The cost of this upkeep is included in the operating cost.
There are currently offices, an accommodation block, a milling building with change rooms and
warehouse facility on the site. Where necessary additional facilities are planned to be installed, or
upgraded such as a laboratory.
The existing power supply to the project site is from the national grid. The capacity of this connection
is limited to 4 000 KVA. No allowance has been included for upgrades to the network other than
connection to the new transformer and relocation of a section of the existing network to allow for the
proposed mine pit advancement.
The mine has an existing permitted TMF, which was constructed during the previous operation of the
mine. Future production has been estimated to generate a total of 1.7 Mt of tailings, which will require
expansion of the current TMF. The expansion is based on the upstream dam method, which will be
conducted in stages.
A water balance has been completed for the site that indicates that the site will have a positive water
balance. It is however, desirable to have some raw water for the process for which Woxna is
permitted to draw from a nearby river, though some further hydrogeological tests are recommended.
1.19 MARKET STUDIES AND CONTRACTS
The European graphite market is estimated to consume approximately 85 000 t/a of the global
demand for natural flake graphite of approximately 540 000 t/a. Today more than 90 % of Europe’s
graphite demand is imported, mainly from China.
The Woxna graphite project will primarily target the European graphite market due to its short transit
times and low transport costs. At 16 600 t/a, the design production volume in the Woxna PEA is
deliberately sized so that graphite sales may be readily absorbed into the European market without
creating an oversupply situation. Further expansion of the Woxna graphite project is possible and will
be evaluated when European market conditions permit.
Graphite prices have risen considerably since the Woxna mine was last operated in 2001. In 2010,
following a long period of flat prices, graphite prices, particularly for flake grades, rose rapidly as a
result of a surge in demand due to restocking, growth from China and lithium batteries.
Simultaneously, the imposition of taxes and permits on Chinese graphite exports restricted supply.
Graphite prices peaked in 2012 and eased to today be approximately double the level seen in 2001.
Graphite market commentators predict that prices may be approaching the bottom and with signs of
economic recovery in the USA and the worst of the recession behind Europe, graphite prices may
again strengthen.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 31
Graphite is not an openly traded mineral with prices negotiated privately between customers and
producers under spot or term contracts. The sale price used in the PEA was based on graphite prices
published by Industrial Minerals magazine (‘’IM’’).
It has been common practice to use a 24 month trailing average graphite price in graphite PEAs. The
Woxna PEA utilized a 12 month trailing average graphite price so as to exclude the peak price period
occurring in 2011/12. Applying Woxna’s planned product distribution to IM’s 12 month trailing average
graphite prices produces an average selling price of 1 199 USD/t for the Woxna PEA. This selling
price is considered to be conservative when compared to the 24 month trailing average graphite price
of 1 548 USD/t or prices used in other graphite project PEAs.
Table 1-7: Average Sale Price Estimation
Size (µm) Purity Proportion of Production
1 Year Trailing Average (USD/t)
Annual Quantity (t)
+ 250 95 % 18 % 1 824 2 990
+ 180, - 250 94 % 22 % 1 526 3 650
+ 100, - 180 92 % 28 % 1 009 4 650
- 100 88 % 32 % 787 5 310
Average / Total 1 199 16 600
1.20 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES, PERMITTING AND SOCIAL OR COMMUNITY IMPACT
Swedish legislation requires the undertaking of an environmental (and social) assessment (in
Swedish “MKB”) at two different stages during the development of a mining project in order to obtain
the necessary permits. MKBs must be performed according to the requirements of the Swedish
Environmental Code (1998:808).
The first MKB is produced when applying for an exploitation (mining) concession in accordance with
the Minerals Act (SFS 1194:45) from the Mining Inspectorate of Sweden (“Bergsstaten”). The second
MKB is produced when applying for environmental permits.
Flinders already has existing valid exploitation and environmental permits for the Woxna project.
According to the Swedish legislation the mine is still in operation, even though the company has not
actively been mining since 2001. All the documentation (Environmental Impact Assessment (“EIA”)
etc.) is in Swedish and mostly originates from the permitting process in 1992.
In order to complete any expansions or significant variations in processing methodologies, Woxna
may need to apply for a new environmental permit. The operation is fully permitted for processing of
0.1 Mt/a of graphite mineralised rock, however the proposed design and economics of the project are
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 32
based on 0.155 Mt/a. Preliminary steps in permit extension are underway and it is anticipated that the
permit extension will be completed by mid to late 2015; before the annual cumulative throughput of
the plant is expected to exceed 0.1 Mt. Short term permit extensions may also be negotiated.
1.21 CAPITAL AND OPERATING COSTS
1.21.1 CAPITAL COSTS
The capital cost estimate has been prepared to the level of a preliminary study, with an accuracy of
-20 % to +30 %, and is presented in USD.
The total initial capital investment for the start-up is USD 16.7 M, which includes contingency and
working capital.
Table 1-8: Initial Capital Cost (M USD)
Cost Centre Total 000
General
100
Mining
200
Process
300
Waste
400
Product
500
Infrast
Total Capital Investment 16.72 5.69 0.15 6.80 3.37 - 0.70
Fixed Capital 14.34 3.75 0.15 6.36 3.37 - 0.70
100 - Direct 10.28 0.31 - 6.36 2.91 - 0.70
200 - Indirect 4.06 3.44 0.15 - 0.46 - -
Working Capital 2.38 1.94 - 0.44 - - -
1.21.2 OPERATING COSTS
An operating cost estimate has been developed for the normal operation of the mine, plant and
infrastructure. The annual cost is
This OPEX Breakdown for the mine and processing plant and infrastructure is shown in Table 1-9,
and are based on LOM average production figures.
Table 1-9: Operating Cost Summary
Area USD/t ROM USD/t graphite
Mining 25.8 240
Processing and Infrastructure 45.3 422
Cost of Sales 7.4 68
Total 78.5 730
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 33
1.22 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
A financial analysis has been conducted to demonstrate the economic performance of the project.
The capital costs, operating costs and mine plan as discussed have been used for this analysis. The
following summarises the IRR and NPV yields of the base case analysis.
Table 1-10 - Summary Economic Analysis
Parameter Phase 1 Unit
LOM 13.0 years
Average Sale Price 1 199 USD/t graphite
Revenue 121.5 USD/t ROM
1 130 USD/t graphite
OPEX 71.1 USD/t ROM
662 USD/t graphite
Cost of Sales 7.4 USD/t ROM
68 USD/t graphite
Margin 50.4 USD/t ROM
468.6 USD/t graphite
Payback Period 3.86 years
IRR 34.0 %
NPV 26.6 M USD
1.23 ADJACENT PROPERTIES
There are no known operators of any relevant activities on directly adjacent properties or locally
adjacent properties.
1.24 INTERPRETATIONS AND CONCLUSIONS
A measured and indicated mineral resource of 2.8 Mt at an average grade of 10.7 % has been
estimated in accordance with NI 43-101 guidelines. Potential for increasing of the mineral resources
are good, with mineralization open down dip and along strike at the Kringel concession and with 3
other historic graphite resources available. This, which requires further drilling to investigate evaluate
its potential.
Golders have developed a mine plan which can be accelerated to deliver 155 000 t/a of potentially
mineralised material for processing.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 34
New metallurgical test work has yielded enhanced flake graphite grades, recoveries and flake sizes
leading to a new process flow sheet to be developed. A combination of refurbished existing and new
processing equipment was specified.
From the process flow sheet and equipment list capital and operating costs have been developed.
A conservative graphite sales price of 1 199 USD/t was estimated based on 1 year trailing average
graphite prices and Woxna’s proposed product volumes.
Based on the production schedule, predicted metallurgical recoveries, estimated costs and base case
price, the Woxna project generates a positive operating margin and cash flows producing an NPV of
USD 26.6 M (post tax, 8% discount rate) and internal rate of return of 34.0 %.
There have been a number of risks and opportunities identified for the project.
Preliminary mining design positively or negatively predicting realistic sinking rate, dilution,
waste dump design, acid rock potential, stability and variations in pit optimisation parameters.
The conversion of metallurgical results to process design
Use of refurbished equipment relating to plant availability and potential for further expansion
Uncertainties relating to PEA level assumptions
1.25 RECOMMENDATIONS
The Woxna project PEA has produced a positive economic outcome and further development of the
project is recommended including:
Drilling of the Kringel deposit to increase the confidence of the resource and provide
geotechnical data for the mine plan
Development of the mine plan to generate mineral reserves
More detailed planning of the waste rock dumps including storage of potentially acid
generating rock
Detailed engineering design of the process plant and tailings facility
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 35
SECTION 2 INTRODUCTION
2.1 CLIENT
This report has been written for Flinders Resources Ltd (“Flinders”), a Toronto Venture Exchange
listed resource company, who is primarily focussed on advancing the Woxna Graphite mine in
Sweden.
2.2 TERMS OF REFERENCE AND PURPOSE
The Woxna Graphite Restart Project (the Project) consists of a partially depleted graphite mine,
graphite processing plant, related infrastructure, 4 mining concessions covering graphite deposits and
numerous adjoining exploration concessions located nearby the town of Edsbyn in the Ovanåker
Municipality, Gävleborg County, in the Kingdom of Sweden. The Project is owned by Woxna Graphite
AB (Woxna), which is 100 % owned by Flinders Resources Ltd (“Flinders”).
The Woxna mine operated from 1996 to 2001, when production was halted due to falling graphite
prices. Since then the site has been held on care and maintenance.
Historically the plant had a rated capacity exceeding 10 000 t/a of flake graphite limited by the
environmental permit condition restricting mining to 100 000 t/a of ore. Historical production achieved
graphite products ranging in purity between 85 % to 94 % Carbon (C). The Project aims to define and
evaluate the requirements to refurbish and restart the Woxna mine including implementing process
improvements.
GBM Minerals Engineering Consultants Ltd. (“GBM”) has been contracted by Flinders to undertake a
Preliminary Economic Assessment (PEA). The purpose of this PEA is to assemble contributions from
GBM, Woxna’s other appointed consultants and experts as outlined in Section 3 to define the
operational configuration, estimate the operating and capital costs of restarting the mine and produce
a financial evaluation of the Project. The PEA is to an accuracy of ± 30 %.
2.3 SOURCES OF INFORMATION
GBM has been provided with various existing project information by Flinders, refer to
Section 27 - References for a complete list. In addition to the published information GBM has visited
the site and conducted an audit of the plant and infrastructure. Other relevant consultants have also
visited the operation to verify information for their relevant scopes of work.
The information supplied has been sufficient to allow this PEA to be completed to the required level of
detail and accuracy.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 36
SECTION 3 RELIANCE ON OTHER EXPERTS
3.1 QUALIFIED PERSONS
The Qualified Person(s) are:
Mr Christopher Stinton, BSc (Hons) (Minerals Engineering), CEng, MIMMM (QP), Senior Process
Engineer with GBM Minerals Engineering Consultants of the United Kingdom. Chris is an independent
consultant to the Company, and takes responsibility for Sections 1, 2, 3, 13, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
24, 25, 26 and 27 of this report.
Mr. Geoff Reed, B App Sc, MAusIMM (QP), Principal of Reed Leyton Consulting Ltd. Geoff is an
independent consultant to the Company, and takes responsibility for Sections 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,
12, 14, 25.1 and 26.1 of this report.
Mr. Bryan Pullman, B.Sc. Eng., P.Eng. (Alberta) (QP), is a Senior Mining Engineer with Golder
Associates (UK) Ltd. Bryan is an independent consultant to the Company, and takes responsibility for
Sections 15, 16, 25.2 and 26.3 of this report.
Mr. Henning Holmström, M.Sc., Ph.D, MAusIMM, MAIG (QP), Director, Woxna Graphite AB Henning
is a non-independent to the Company, and has co-authored, together .with Christopher Stinton,
Sections 18.3 to 18.6, 25.5 and 26.6 of this report.
3.2 RELIANCE ON OTHER EXPERTS
In compiling the PEA, GBM reviewed and relied on expert opinions and information from Flinders and
Woxna Graphite on relevant legal, political environmental and tax matters. The extent of reliance,
source and effected sections are as follows.
All information on the mining legality and land ownership was provided by Mikael Ranggård,
Woxna Graphite via email exchange and conversation during late 2012. This information has
strongly influenced Section 4.
All information on environmental matters (including permitting) was provided by Henning
Holmström, Woxna Graphite via email exchange and conversation during 2012 and 2013.
This information has strongly influenced Section 20.
All information relating to Flinders tax assets (loss and depreciation carry forward) and
accounting of deprecation in Sweden was provided by Mats Lindén, accountant to Woxna
Graphite via email and conversation in August 2013. This information has been included in
Section 22.
Market trends and verification of off-market contract pricing ranges was provided by Mikael Ranggård,
lawyer of 20 years and Chairman of Woxna Graphite and Martin McFarlane, chemical engineer with
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 37
25 years of project development and former CEO of Flinders Resources, in support of the Industrial
Minerals database prices used (accessed under subscription) via email exchange and conversation
during 2012 and 2013. GBM have relied on the information from Mr McFarlane and Mr Ranggård
under knowledge that they have conducted discussions with potential off-takers and have monitored
the graphite market as part of their employment by Woxna and Flinders. This information has strongly
influenced Section 19. This information validated the database pricing obtained and as such no
further validation was deemed required.
3.3 VERIFICATION
GBM personnel have inspected the project site and verified its characteristics as stated in respective
sections of this report.
The authors have carried out due diligence reviews of the information provided to them by the Client
and others for the preparation of this report and are satisfied that the information was accurate at the
time of the report and that the interpretations and opinions expressed in them were reasonable and
based on current understanding of mining and processing techniques and costs, economics,
mineralisation processes and the host geologic setting. The authors have made reasonable efforts to
verify the accuracy of the data relied on in this report.
3.4 FINANCIAL INTEREST DISCLAIMER
Neither GBM nor any of the consultants employed in the preparation of this report have any beneficial
interest in the assets of Woxna Graphite AB or Flinders Resources Ltd.
As outlined, some data has been provided by Woxna Graphite and its employees. This work has been
reviewed and GBM has no reason to believe that pecuniary interest has influenced the validity of the
information presented.
Contributing consultants have been paid fees and will continue to be paid fees for this work in
accordance with normal professional consulting practices.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 38
SECTION 4 PROPERTY DESCRIPTION AND LOCATION
4.1 LOCATION
The Woxna graphite project is located at 61º 26´ 08.94˝N and 15º 36´ 16.31˝E, some 8 km WNW of
the town of Edsbyn (Figure 4-1) in the Ovanåker Municipality, Gävleborg County, in the Kingdom of
Sweden.
Figure 4-1: Location of Flinders Resources Graphite Projects, Sweden
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 39
Table 4-1: Woxna Graphite Project Tenure
Property
Type of Area Valid Until Extraction permit
Conditions Mineral Tenure
(ha) (date) (Environmental
permit)
Kringelgruvan Mining Lease
30.77 31/12/2016
Permits received and still valid 1992-09-17
and 1992-10-27
Environmental permit valid for 100 kt annual ore processing.
nr 1 (Exploitation concession)
Mining has depleted 300kt from historical resource.
*
**
Gropabo Mining Lease
18.20 21/02/2025
Permit received 2005-03-21
*** (Exploitation concession)
Expired 2012-04-18
Mattsmyra Mining Lease
72.97 21/02/2025
Permit received 2005-03-21
*** (Exploitation concession)
Expired 2012-04-18
Månsberg
Mining Lease
24.77 27/12/2024 No application
filed (Exploitation
concession)
* Is automatically extended 10 years when a mine is in operation
** The central graphite deposit incl. mine, mill, tailings impoundment, clarification pond and the rest of the facilities.
*** Surrounding graphite deposit (no mine).
Woxna Graphite AB, Flinders’ 100 % owned Swedish subsidiary, owns 4 mining concessions over
graphite deposits (Kringel, Gropabo, Mattsmyra and Mansberg – the Woxna Project) located along a
40km trend in central Sweden. The PEA considers only one of these deposits, the Kringel deposit.
The partially mined Kringel deposit lies adjacent to the processing plant, tailings dam and related
infrastructure, and is fully permitted for an immediate restart. Woxna is currently reprocessing
graphite and last mined graphite in 2001.
The Gropabo, Mattsmyra and Mansberg concession contain historic flake graphite resources. These
will continue to be classified as historic resources until Flinders has the opportunity to upgrade them
to NI43-101 standards. These historic resources are not included in the economic analysis of the
PEA.
4.2 MINING LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Swedish mining laws changed profoundly in 1992 when the new Minerals Act of 1991 (effective 1 July
1992) for the first time allowed foreign ownership of mineral titles in Sweden. The right of the
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 40
Swedish state to acquire 50 % of a mine was repealed a year later. Exploration permits and mining
licences approved before 1 July 1992 are governed by the Minerals Act of 1974 that does not permit
foreign ownership of mineral title or surface rights.
Rules and regulations pertaining to mining exploration in Sweden are clearly outlined in the “Guide to
Mineral Legislation and Regulations in Sweden” (2000) available from the offices or the website of the
Geological Survey (www.sgu.se). The Mining Inspectorate of Sweden provides clear directives,
available from the Inspectorate website (www.bergsstaten.se), for conducting mining and exploration.
Flinders has, or will address, all requirements before undertaking any work on its concessions. The
company has the rights to access the properties, and no restrictions or limitations as defined for work
on the projects are evident. The company has the obligation to outline a work program and gain
permission from landholders prior to accessing the properties, and to provide compensation for any
ground-disturbing work conducted.
The information in the following subsections was provided from the website of the Mining Inspectorate
of Sweden (Bergsstaten), being the agency responsible for the administration of mineral resources in
Sweden.
4.2.1 MINING INSPECTORATE
The Bergsstaten is managed under the Ministry of Industry, Employment and Communications, and
reports to and receives administrative and other support from the Geological Survey of Sweden
(SGU). The director of the Inspectorate is the Chief Mining Inspector, appointed by the Government.
The functions of the Inspectorate are to issue permits under the Minerals Act (1991:45) for the
exploration and exploitation of mineral deposits and to ensure compliance with the Act.
The Mining Inspectorate became a single authority on 1 July 1998, when an earlier subdivision into
districts (mining inspectors' offices) was abolished by a parliamentary decision. The Inspectorate now
has offices in Luleå (the Head Office) and Falun. The Mining Inspectorate was established as a state
authority in 1637.
4.2.2 LEGISLATION ON MINERALS
The Minerals Act (1991:45) came into force on 1 July 1992. It has subsequently been amended as
follows:
1 July 1993, abolition of the rules giving the state a half share in mines (1993:690),
1 July 1998, introduction of protection zone rules for mines (1998:165),
1 January 1999, adapted to the new Environmental Code (1998:808), which entered into
force on the same date.
The other principal acts and ordinances governing the exploitation of minerals are:
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 41
Minerals Ordinance (1992:285),
The Act on the Continental Shelf (1966:314),
The Continental Shelf Ordinance (1966:315),
The Certain Peat Deposits Act (1985:620),
The Certain Peat Deposits Ordinance (1985:626).
Over the last century, Sweden has had the following laws relating to minerals:
The 1884 Mining Regulation (1884:24), which was replaced by
The 1938 Mining Act (1938:314), which was in turn superseded by
The 1974 Mining Act (1974:342).
The 1886 Coal Deposits Act (1886:46) and
The 1960 Graphite Act (1960:679). These were both replaced by
The Act concerning Certain Mineral Deposits (1974:890).
The Minerals Act currently in force replaced both the 1974 Mining Act and the Act concerning Certain
Mineral Deposits of the same year. Depending on the type of land affected and work to be carried
out, there are varying requirements for official approvals.
The following table reflects the normal steps to be followed and approvals gained from exploration
through to final approval of mining in Sweden.
Approval Required Authority
1. Exploration permit (undersökningstillstånd) (survey of the bedrock)
Mining Inspector
2. Exploration work (undersökningsarbete) (when the environment or land use is affected)
County Administrative Board etc; Landowner
3. Exploitation concession (bearbetningskoncession) (with environmental impact assessment and approval under chapters 3–4 of the Environmental Code)
Mining Inspector; County Administrative Board etc or Government in case of disagreement)
4. Permission under the Environmental Code (Chapter 9 of the Code)
Environmental Court
5. Designation of land (markanvisning) Landowner; Mining Inspector
6. Building permit etc. under the Planning and Building Act Local authority
4.3 PERMITS AND CONCESSIONS
4.3.1 EXPLORATION PERMITS
The Minerals Act relates to the exploration and exploitation of certain mineral deposits on land,
regardless of the ownership of the land. Applications for permits etc. are made to the Mining
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 42
Inspectorate (Bergsstaten). The Act defines to which mineral substances its provisions apply; these
are known as concession minerals. Concession minerals are divided into three categories, being
traditional ores, certain industrial minerals, and finally oil, gas and diamonds. Other minerals and
other kinds of rock, gravel and sand are excluded from the Act and are normally referred to as
landowner minerals.
An exploration permit (undersökningstillstånd) gives access to the land and an exclusive right to
explore within the permit area. It does not entitle the holder to undertake exploration work in
contravention of any environmental regulations that apply to the area. Applications for exemptions
are normally made to the County Administrative Board.
An exploration permit is granted for a specific area where a successful discovery is likely to be made.
It should be of a suitable shape and size and no larger than may be expected to be explored by the
permit holder in an appropriate manner. A permit is to be granted if there is reason to assume that
exploration in the area may lead to the discovery of a concession mineral.
An exploration permit is initially valid for a period of three years, after which it can be extended up to a
total of 15 years if special conditions are met.
Compensation must be paid by the permit holder for damage or encroachment caused by exploration
work.
When an exploration permit expires without an exploitation concession being granted, the results of
the exploration work undertaken must be reported to the Mining Inspector.
4.3.2 EXPLOITATION CONCESSIONS
An exploitation concession (bearbetningskoncession) gives the holder the right to exploit a proven,
extractable mineral deposit for a period of 25 years, which may be extended. Permits and
concessions under the Minerals Act may be transferred with the permission of the Mining Inspector.
An exploitation concession relates to a distinct area, designated on the basis of the location and
extent of a proven mineral deposit. A concession may be granted when a mineral deposit is
discovered which is probably technically and economically recoverable during the period of the
concession, and if the nature and position of the deposit does not make it inappropriate to grant a
concession. Special provisions apply to concessions relating to oil and gaseous hydrocarbons.
Under the provisions of the Environmental Code, an application for an exploitation concession is to be
accompanied by an environmental impact assessment. Applications are considered in consultation
with the County Administrative Board, taking into account whether the site is acceptable from an
environmental point of view.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 43
4.3.3 PERMIT FROM THE ENVIRONMENTAL COURT
Under the rules of the Environmental Code, a special environmental impact assessment for the
mining operation must always be submitted to the Environmental Court, which examines the impact of
the operation on the environment in a broad sense. The Court also stipulates the conditions which the
operation is to meet.
4.4 ACQUISITION OF LAND
Land needed for exploitation is normally acquired by the mining company through contracts of sale or
leases. If there is a contract of sale, a property registration procedure must generally be undertaken
through the Land Survey authority in order for registration of title to be granted.
Before any land, inside or outside the concession area, may be used it has to be designated by the
Mining Inspector (markanvisning). This procedure usually regulates the compensation etc. to be paid
to affected landowners, normally on the basis of an agreement between the company and the
landowners, together with any other parties whose rights may be affected.
4.5 TAXES AND DUTIES
Mining companies (limited companies) pay corporation tax at a rate of 22 % under the same rules as
every other company. Accordingly, there are no special taxation rules for such companies.
For permits granted after 2005, a royalty is paid on the value of minerals produced at a rate of 0.2 %,
which is shared between the landholder and the State each receiving 0.15 % and 0.05 % respectively.
As Woxna’s exploitation concessions were granted prior to 2005, this royalty does not apply to
Kringelgruvan nr1 mining licence.
The application fee for an exploration permit is SEK 500 for each area of 2 000 ha or part thereof. The
exploration fee varies for different concession minerals and for different periods of validity.
The application fee for an exploitation concession is SEK 6 000 per area.
4.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
There are no current outstanding environmental liabilities on any of the licenses and, as required by
Swedish law, all landowners identified by Flinders have been informed by the Swedish Inspectorate of
Mines (Bergsstaten) that an exploration license has been applied for in accordance with
Chapters 1.1 and 2 of the Mineral Act.
No environmental or planning permitting is required for geological mapping and minor, scattered hand
till sampling. Permits are required however from the district authorities for systematic till sampling,
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 44
trenching and drilling programs. A small environmental bond has been paid for the exploration
license and for the new mining license about SEK 30 000 bond is required before any drilling may
commence.
4.7 FLINDERS’ PROPERTY LOCATIONS
As indicated above, Flinders holds 4 mining leases in central Sweden. Woxna mine site is located on
Kringelgruvan nr 1 mining lease which is the key project area and the subject of this report.
4.7.1 KRINGELGRUVAN CLAIM
A 500 000 SEK (Swedish kronor) security has been paid against the Mining Lease. The project co-
ordinates are defined in the Mining Inspector’s (Bergsstaten) decision DNR 320-71X-1991 with the
following cornice co-ordinates (Table 4-2) in Swedish Reference frame 1999 (SWEREF99TM). Note
that in Swedish convention x and y are interchanged from normal usage elsewhere.
Table 4-2: Woxna Graphite Project – Kringelgruvan nr 1 Mining Concession Co-ordinates
Point Northing (metres) Easting (metres)
1 6 808 741.31 533 122.19
2 6 808 436.43 533 123.96
3 6 808 433.90 532 191.28
4 6 808 477.36 531 986.81
5 6 808 493.44 531 912.64
6 6 808 601.71 531 937.29
7 6 808 628.45 531 997.94
8 6 808 632.78 532 024.88
9 6 808 724.75 532 590.56
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 45
SECTION 5 ACCESSIBILITY, CLIMATE, LOCAL RESOURCES,
INFRASTRUCTURE AND PHYSIOGRAPHY
5.1 ACCESS
The project is accessible from the tarred east west Route 301, which is an all-weather road. Local
access to the Kringelgruvan Mining Lease is on unsealed all-weather forestry roads.
The operating season is all year round, with possible short and minor disruptions at the height of
winter with snowfall and very low temperatures.
5.2 PHYSIOGRAPHY
The landscape was sculpted by extensive glaciers to form shallow lakes and extensive boggy
lowlands during the most recent ice age, spanning a period between three and ten thousand years
ago. Broad valleys were scoured out in the direction of glacial transport flanking low-lying hills
underlain by resistant rocks. The landscape of Sweden is dominated by low rolling hills (70 %) and flat
lowlands (30 %) comprised of bogs and lakes. Hills are mostly covered by glacial moraine and sands
and forested, primarily with birch and pine.
The project elevation ranges from approximately 220 m to 280 m in relief and comprises NW-SE
orientated low hills with trellised local stream drainage and numerous fresh water lakes, of which the
Råttjärnasjön and Loftssjön are the largest. These, in the main, ultimately flow to the Woxnan River
which is an incised meandering river to the south of the Kringelgruvan mineral claim. The Woxnan
River is the source of hydro-power in the district.
The graphite mineralization of Kringelgruvan is located to the southern slope of Gräsberget.
5.3 CLIMATE
The climate is comparatively temperate, considering the Project’s northern latitude. The climate is
typical of Fennoscandia with cool summers and cold winters. The principal moderating influences are
the Gulf Stream and the prevailing westerly winds, which blow in from the relatively warm Atlantic
Ocean. In winter these influences are offset by cold air masses that periodically sweep in from the
east.
At Edsbyn, some 10 km to the south west of the project area, the monthly average minimum
temperature ranges from -8 °C to +11 °C and the range of average maximum monthly temperatures is
-1 °C to +23 °C. Edsbyn receives 30 mm to 70 mm of precipitation per month with fall and winter
typically drier and spring and summer typically wetter periods.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 46
5.4 WATER, POWER AND TELECOMS
Connected grid power, water and telecoms including internet are available at the Kringelgruvan
processing plant and open pit. Mobile telephone services are widely available.
5.5 LOCAL RESOURCES
Local services, in terms of machine and engineering plant maintenance, are available in Edsbyn.
Road, rail and service infrastructure is well developed. Sweden has a long history of mining and local
and specialised labour is widely available.
The local economy has been focussed on forestry and plantation cropping since the 1890s. This is
now a largely mechanised enterprise and uses similar types of machinery used in mining operations.
There are some localised seasonal pasture and very minor cropping. The nearby Woxnan River is
used for tourism and recreation. The local population numbers approximately 11 000 people.
All social and industrial needs and services such as accommodation, provisions, supplies,
communications etc. are readily and commercially available. They are of high standard, typical of the
modern industrial economy that is Sweden. The national power grid extends throughout the region.
Water resources are plentiful.
Vegetation is a mixture of pine and fern forest, with some localised bogs in low-lying areas. The
Kringelgruvan lease, pit, processing plant and tailings facility are largely cleared of local vegetation.
The area has stands of commercial timber. The surface freehold owners are mostly Swedish and
international forestry companies. The extent and location of these surface holders in the vicinity of
the Kringelgruvan Mining Lease are known to the Company and verified by Reed Leyton.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 47
Figure 5-1: Topography and Access of the Kringelgruvan Project Area
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 48
SECTION 6 HISTORY
The initial discovery of graphite at Woxna was made in 1983 by a prospector engaged by the Swedish
Geological Survey (SGU) as part of a regional mapping program tracking large boulders in
Quaternary age moraine. The original surveys were directed at uranium exploration using airborne
radiometric data. The SGU and its agencies followed the discovery with both regional airborne and
local ground-based surveys, including electromagnetic (Slingram) VLF, and magnetometer methods,
to delineate geophysical conductors under the thin cap of recent till.
EM methods have proven to be very efficient delineators of conductive zones containing schlieren
and blebs of coarse graphite, as well as associated zones with 1 % to 5 % pyrrhotite. In 1988-1989
sufficient drilling was undertaken at Kringelgruvan and the other 3 mining licences to delineate the
historic resources.
In 1993, the concessions passed to Woxna Graphite AB, a small Swedish-based company
specialising in the development of industrial mineral properties.
The historic field work, chemical analysis and historic resource estimates discussed in the Reed
Leyton Report (2012) were conducted by previous private organizations. Data generated in 2012 was
under the guidance of the staff and contractors of Flinders Resources Ltd.
6.1 HISTORICAL DEPOSIT OWNERSHIP AND EXPLORATION
Kringelgruvan mineralization was discovered in 1986 by Slingram measurements and subsequent
trenching. More trenching followed in 1987 and the first drilling commenced in 1988. A 2nd drill
phase was undertaken the following year. Additional ground geophysics was conducted in 1989 to
cover a larger area. All historic exploration work was completed by the precursors of today’s Swedish
Geological Survey; namely SGAB and NSG (Sveriges Geologiska AB and Nämnden för statens
gruvegendom respectively). In 1992 the concession passed to Mineral Resources AB (“MIRAB”) a
Swedish private company who later sold it to Tricorona AB.
Tricorona brought the project into production in 1996. The mine was in production until 2001 when it
closed down due to declining graphite prices.
Table 6-1: Drilling History of the Kringelgruvan Project
Hole Type Year Hole
Number Metres Tenement
DD 1988 28 1 595 Kringelgruvan
DD 1989 23 1 314 Kringelgruvan
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 49
6.2 SAMPLING AND CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Original assay results exist in a database compiled by the Swedish Geological Survey which was
taken over by Woxna Graphite AB in 1992. Analysis was made by the Leco furnace method by
SGABs laboratory in Luleå. No information is currently available as to specific quality assurance,
quality control (QA/QC) protocols used by the SGU in its drilling or analytical program, however work
completed by the SGU is routinely of a high standard.
6.3 DENSITY DETERMINATION
No bulk density determinations conducted on mineralized intervals have been viewed by Reed
Leyton.
6.4 PETROLOGY
In total 107 thin sections were prepared from core between 1988 and 1989 (as reported in
publications coded PRAP_88537 and PRAP 88532). The studies mainly focused on the graphite
flake size and associated mineralogical distribution of the mineralization.
6.5 HISTORICAL MINERAL RESOURCE ESTIMATES
The Kringelgruvan deposit has an historical estimate of Mineral Resources or Mineral Reserves,
which have previously been disclosed in accordance with paragraph 2.4(a) of the Instrument.
Table 6-2: Woxna Graphite Project Historical Resources (after Claesson, 2002)
Tenement Classification** Tonnes Grade C Cut-off
Date Notes (Mt) (%) (%)
Kringelgruvan Measured 1.11 11.3 7 1988 2
Kringelgruvan Indicated 0.22 11.4 7 1988 1
Total 1.33 11.3 7 1988 3
** Foreign resource as provided for in Part 2 of the Companion Policy to NI 43-101
The Company chose to disclose historical estimates for each of the Woxna tenements under Part 2,
2.4 Disclosure of Historical estimates. The estimates (Table 6-2) were performed by Dr L-A
Claesson, Eur Geol. and a Qualified Person as contemplated by the NI 43-101 instrument. The
estimate has been classified according to the principles of JORC and NI 43-101 by the Qualified
Person. The estimates are cross-sectional polygonal interpretations using a simple nearest-
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 50
neighbour, sectional approach and using a density of 2.7 g/cm³ to convert volume to tonnage.
Density assumptions are supported by test work.
Data used in calculating these Historic Mineral Resource Estimates is historical in nature and was
compiled prior to the implementation of NI 43-101 reporting standards. Reed Leyton has not
completed sufficient exploration to verify the estimates. Reed Leyton is not treating them as National
Instrument defined resources or reserves verified by a Qualified Person, and the historical estimate
should not be relied upon.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 51
SECTION 7 GEOLOGICAL SETTING AND MINERALIZATION
7.1 REGIONAL GEOLOGY
The geology of Sweden consists of three main components: Precambrian crystalline rocks, the
remnants of a younger sedimentary rock cover, and rocks of Caledonian Orogen (490 Ma – 390 Ma).
The Precambrian rocks are part of a stable area known as the Baltic or Fennoscandian Shield).
These consist of rocks formed during the Precambrian period, i.e., at some time between the
formation of the Earth about 4.6 billion years ago and the start of the Cambrian period about 545 M
years ago.
The oldest rocks preserved in Sweden are of Archaean age (>2.5 billion years old). Archaean rocks,
however, only occur to a limited extent in the northernmost part of the country. The rocks in the rest
of northern Sweden and in the eastern and southern parts of the country are generally between
2.0 billion years old and 1.65 billion years old. They formed, and were in many cases also
metamorphosed, during the Sveco-Karelian Orogeny, which also affected the older Archaean rocks.
Bedrock in southwestern Sweden is mainly between 1.7 billion years old and 1.55 billion years old. It
was metamorphosed during the Sveco-Norwegian Orogeny, which occurred about 1 100 M years ago
to 900 M years ago. In the south, bedrock was also metamorphosed at an intermediate stage,
between 1 450 M years and 1 400 M years.
Phanerozoic sedimentary rocks rest unconformably on the Precambrian shield area. They are less
than 545 M years old and cover large parts of Skåne, the islands of Öland and Gotland, the Östgöta
and Närke plains, the Västgöta mountains, the area around Lake Siljan in Dalarna and areas along
the Caledonian Orogen in northern Sweden.
The youngest rocks in Sweden are Tertiary age rocks, formed circa 55 M years ago. These occur in
the most southerly and southwestern parts of Skåne.
The Caledonian Orogeny is the youngest deformation event in Sweden, dated at
490 M years - 390 M years. The rocks of this remnant mountain chain vary in age from Precambrian
to early Devonian, i.e., >390 M years old.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 52
Figure 7-1: Regional Geology of the Kringelgruvan Project Area
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 53
7.2 LOCAL GEOLOGY
The Kringelgruvan claim shows development of trace to massive graphite in metasedimentary and
metavolcanic host rocks which have been metamorphosed to sillimanite grade and intruded by felsic
units ranging from alkali pegmatite to granite. Kringelgruvan has variable cover of 2 m to 15 m of
Quaternary age moraine.
At Kringelgruvan, the geology is dominated by steeply-dipping, calcareous quartz-rich meta-tuff, with
interbedded metasedimentary units and cross-cutting pegmatite. Two discrete tabular zones of
graphite mineralisation are developed and trace pyrrhotite is associated with the mineralised zone, its
foot wall and hanging wall. The mineral assemblage includes accessory prehnite and zoisite and the
ubiquitous quartz-feldspar-chlorite-sericite assemblage indicating a lower grade of metamorphism.
The mineralisation is tabular in shape, and late in the structural history, postdating and cross-cutting
any remnant tectonised and metamorphosed lithologies.
Figure 7-2: Local Geology of the Kringelgruvan Project Area
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 54
SECTION 8 DEPOSIT TYPES
Graphite is developed as an accessory mineral as laminated aggregates dispersed through schistose
and siliceous metamorphic rocks. Graphite is an opaque mineral with six-sided form and crystallises
in the hexagonal system with rhombohedral symmetry. It has a perfect basal cleavage and thus
presents as flat flakes. These have a metallic lustre. Graphite is found as both flakes (>70 µm) and a
finer-grained amorphous, microcrystalline type. Graphite has a dark streak and is visually obvious in
core.
Graphite occurs mainly in five rock associations (Taylor, 2006) and these are:
Amorphous deposits formed by the thermal metamorphism of coal or carbon-rich
sedimentary rocks;
Disseminated in marble - metamorphosed dolomite or a calcareous protolith;
Veins filling fractures fissures and cavities in country rock;
Disseminated in metamorphosed silica-rich metasedimentary rocks such as quartzites;
Contact metasomatic or hydrothermal deposits in metamorphosed calcareous sedimentary
or volcaniclastic protoliths.
At Woxna, the lattermost is the dominant type, associated with prominent pegmatite intrusions that
are interpreted to be the heat source during contact metamorphism. The pegmatite intrusions
comprise quartz, orthoclase and phlogopite and intrude a metamorphosed, highly strained
stratigraphic succession dominated by sedimentary and volcaniclastic protolithologies, which have
undergone later brittle fracturing.
The graphite deposits occur beneath a thin blanket of Quaternary age moraine deposits. The
graphite and minor associated pyrrhotite are excellent conductors that allow for prospecting using
geophysical methods.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 55
Figure 8-1: Graphite Mineralisation of the Kringelgruvan Project Area
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 56
Figure 8-2: Graphite Mineralisation of the Kringelgruvan Project Area
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 57
SECTION 9 EXPLORATION
Exploration in the early 1980s proceeded under the direction of the Swedish Geological Survey and
subsequently by MIRAB following their acquisition of the exploration and mining leases from the
Swedish State in 1992.
MIRAB defined and evaluated the Woxna graphite deposits and then sold the project to Tricorona AB
who constructed the Woxna graphite mine, where production started in 1996 by its subsidiary, Woxna
Graphite AB. Production ceased in 2001.
Initial discovery was of a single large mineralised boulder in Quaternary moraine float on the
Kringelgruvan claim. Systematic exploration took place from 1985 onwards using geophysics as the
primary anomaly definer. Magnetic, radiometric and electromagnetic methods were used; of these,
electromagnetic techniques have proved to be the definitive target generator. Electromagnetic
methods rely on an electrical or field response being induced on target rock types with responses
predicated on host rock mineralogy. VLF (very low frequency) Slingram methods at 3.6 kHz and 60 m
coil spacing proved to be the optimal settings. Kringelgruvan has been covered at 100 m x 80 m to
200 m x 80 m profile spacing. Follow-up diamond drilling took place from 1988-1989. All drilling is
diamond drilling at 35 mm core size diameter and all core is half-sectioned, with samples submitted
for analysis to the Sveriges Geologiska AB in Luleå (in the case of the Kringelgruvan tenement). All
sampling was analysed using the Leco thermal IR (infrared) methodology.
The Leco family of analyses are digitally controlled and designed to measure the carbon and sulphur
content in a wide variety of organic materials, as well as inorganic samples including soil, cement and
limestone. Analysis begins by weighing out a sample into a combustion crucible. On analysis, the
sample is typically combusted at >1 350 °C in a pure oxygen environment. All sample materials
contained in the crucible go through an oxidative reduction process which causes carbon-bearing
compounds to break down, producing elemental carbon, which oxidises to form CO2. From the
combustion chamber, the gases flow through two Anhydrone (MgClO4) tubes to remove moisture,
through a flow controller (3.5 l/min) then through to an infrared (IR) detection cell. The IR cell
measures the concentration of carbon dioxide gas present. The LECO analysers have an inherent
manufacturer specified accuracy of +/- 1 % carbon present.
During the spring and summer of 2012 Flinders Resource Ltd through its Swedish subsidiary Woxna
Graphite AB completed 3 673 m of drilling over 41 diamond drill holes at the Kringelgruvan mining
licence.
Sixteen north – south orientated profiles were drilled across the Kringelgruvan deposit at 50 m
spacing. Three of these profiles were infill type drilling on profiles existing from the historical drilling
programs. Of the 3 673 m of drilling, 270 m was overburden drilling, the remaining 3 403 m being
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 58
core. Drilling was completed by contractor Ludvika Borrteknik AB using a GM100 rig and BGM size
rods producing a core with diameter 42 mm.
Originally it was planned to drill 36 holes for a total of 3 000 m, but as initial results were favourable it
was decided to extend the program. Five additional drill holes were drilled resulting in the 41 holes
(Table 9-1).
The location of the 2012 drill holes are shown as red dots on Figure 10-1.
Table 9-1: Flinders Drilling of the Kringelgruvan Project
Hole Type YEAR Hole
Number Meters Tenement
DD 2012 41 3 673 Kringelgruvan
The profile spacing is approximately 50 m and distance between holes on section is generally 50 m.
Most holes are dipping 50 °. Hole lengths are typically be around 100 m, resulting in a vertical depth
test of around 80 m. Shorter holes were drilled where the graphite was intersected close to surface.
Hole numbering starts with the abbreviation KRI followed by the year (12) and ends with a continuous
hole no from KRI12001 to KRI12041.
Twelve drill holes have been deviation surveyed to date. The start azimuth was measured using the
Reflex Azimuth Pointing System (APS), which is a GPS based compass that measures true north
azimuth and is not affected by magnetic disturbance. Any uncertainty in drill hole trend caused by the
lack of surveys is considered minor at the spacing of the drill holes and relatively short hole length in
relation to a scale of the resource.
Drill holes were laid out with the aid of a GPS, with hole spacing confirmed by tape and compass. At
the end of the drilling program, an independent Swedish company conducted a DGPS survey during
which the location of 40 holes where measured with an accuracy of between 0.01 m and 0.2 m (XYZ).
Additional DGPS surveying was conducted by Tyréns in January 2013. Where possible, Flinders
Resources Ltd has surveyed all drill collars by DGPS. The exception is the drill collars now located in
the bounds of the pit which were removed during mining. Position for these drill holes has been
calculated by converting the historic local grid into coordinates of SWEREF99 and are assumed
accurate.
The rock competence in holes viewed by Reed Leyton was in general very good. Fractured rock was
encountered only locally.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 59
SECTION 10 DRILLING
Drilling activity reported is from exploration conducted by previous operators, primarily Sveriges
Geologiska AB and Flinders Resources Ltd. All remnant drill core, after sampling, is stored in wooden
core boxes at the Kringelgruvan project.
Sub-cropping graphite mineralisation was the first zone of mineralisation to be discovered by
geophysical methods and subsequently developed. At Kringelgruvan, graphite mineralisation is
associated with schlieren (sheared restite remnants) associated with pegmatite intrusion into
Paleoproterozoic age meta-argillites and meta-tuffites (Claesson et al., 1988; Claesson et al., 1989a;
Claesson et al., 1989b). Coarse-, medium- and fine-grained graphite is developed as coarse blebs in
monomineralic zones. Parts of the mineralised zone contain wispy pyrrhotite (Fe1-xS2). The
combination of both graphite and pyrrhotite is the cause of the strong geophysical response to ground
electromagnetic techniques applied during early exploration.
A total of 2 909 m of diamond core was drilled (Table 6-1) on the tenement in 1988 and 1989 and
comprises 51 diamond drill holes (35 mm core size). These holes occur on 6 cross-sections in local
grid coordinates extending over an approximate strike length of 600 m. Drill spacing is a nominal
20 m x 50 m. All drill core beneath Quaternary age moraine deposits (3 m to 20 m depth) was
sampled continuously. All 1988 drilling was at -60º dip and 1989 drilling at -50 ° to -55 ° dip.
Mineralisation dips to the SW at 70 ° to 80 °.
The historic program resulted in 374 graphite analyses (carbon by Leco analyser) and 52 sulphur
assays (by Leco). Selective samples were analysed by whole rock ICP for major and minor elements
and LOI (loss on ignition). Twenty-five samples were submitted to the petrophysical laboratory of
Sveriges Geologiska AB for density measurements using the Archimedes (water immersion) method.
Drilling conducted by Flinders Resources Ltd was carried out in 2012. A total of 41 holes comprising
3 673 metres of diamond core were drilled. Inside hole diameter was 42 mm. The holes were
designed to: 1) infill on historic drill sections or 2) as step-outs on a 50 m x 50 m nominal spacing.
The drill dip was -50 ° and the azimuth was either 16 ° or 340 °. Combined with the historic drilling, a
total of 6 581 m have now been drilled at Kringelgruvan.
All Flinders drill core was sampled continuously based on the logged geology. The program resulted
in 1 345 graphite analyses (carbon by Leco analyser). Every 3rd sample (33 %) was assayed for
Sulphur (by Leco analyser) up until drill hole KRI12015. Flinders was advised to assay every 2nd
sample for sulphur, starting with drill hole KRI12016. The average is every 3rd sample (33 %) was
assayed for Sulphur (by Leco analyser). In Total 441 samples were assayed for Sulphur. Every 12th
sample (8 %) was assayed by ICP-MS for major and minor elements. Density measurements were
conducted by Flinders staff using the Archimedes method. In total 1 424 measurements were made
covering each assay interval as well as the lithologies in the foot and hanging walls.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 60
No historic data has been presented on sample recovery, but visual inspection of remnant core
indicates that sample recoveries were not good. Sample recovery from Flinders Resources drilling
was generally >95 %.
Figure 10-1: Drilling at the Kringelgruvan Project Area
Table 10-1: Kringelgruvan Drill Collar Co-ordinates (SWEREF99 TM Grid)
Hole_ID Easting
(m)
Northing
(m)
RL
(m) Total Depth
Dip
(°)
Azimuth
(°) Drill Type
Hole Size (mm)
KRIN88001 533 050 6 808 524 254.28 52.15 - 60 349 DD 35 mm
KRIN88002 533 058 6 808 507 252.52 48.80 - 60 349 DD 35 mm
KRIN88003 533 098 6 808 546 256.47 35.75 - 60 345 DD 35mm
KRIN88004 532 963 6 808 551 251.34 37.30 - 60 65 DD 35 mm
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 61
Hole_ID Easting
(m)
Northing
(m)
RL
(m) Total Depth
Dip
(°)
Azimuth
(°) Drill Type
Hole Size (mm)
KRIN88005 532 946 6 808 542 250.82 46.3 - 60 65 DD 35 mm
KRIN88006 532 980 6 808 583 255.10 25.05 - 60 345 DD 35 mm
KRIN88007 532 983 6 808 560 253.36 99.6 - 60 349 DD 35 mm
KRIN88008 533 007 6 808 607 257.50 34.15 - 60 349 DD 35 mm
KRIN88009 532 938 6 808 692 266.06 34.25 - 60 345 DD 35 mm
KRIN88010 532 955 6 808 655 260.42 48.85 - 60 345 DD 35 mm
KRIN88011 532 966 6 808 636 257.73 57.65 - 60 345 DD 35 mm
KRIN88012 532 985 6 808 691 265.32 30.35 - 60 349 DD 35 mm
KRIN88013 532 991 6 808 672 263.38 48.7 - 60 349 DD 35 mm
KRIN88014 532 992 6 808 642 259.04 43.1 - 60 349 DD 35 mm
KRIN88015 533 040 6 808 686 268.74 35.75 - 60 349 DD 35 mm
KRIN88016 533 060 6 808 654 263.05 56.15 - 60 345 DD 35 mm
KRIN88017 532 991 6 808 511 250.38 94.15 - 60 358 DD 35 mm
KRIN88018 532 899 6 808 673 261.82 39.8 - 60 349 DD 35 mm
KRIN88019 532 973 6 808 594 255.14 72.7 - 60 334 DD 35 mm
KRIN88020 533 001 6 808 620 256.09 66.8 - 60 349 DD 35 mm
KRIN88021 533 079 6 808 619 255.19 81.85 - 60 334 DD 35 mm
KRIN88022 533 095 6 808 596 258.22 100.85 - 60 334 DD 35 mm
KRIN88023 533 098 6 808 680 267.29 48.7 - 60 345 DD 35 mm
KRIN88024 533 120 6 808 643 264.08 76.8 - 55 345 DD 35 mm
KRIN88025 533 133 6 808 618 261.96 86.6 - 50 345 DD 35 mm
KRIN88026 533 019 6 808 573 255.83 98.8 - 50 345 DD 35 mm
KRIN88027 532 927 6 808 557 248.14 48.05 - 55 349 DD 35 mm
KRIN88028 532 869 6 808 508 252.12 45.75 - 50 341 DD 35 mm
KRIN89001 531 936 6 808 520 222.67 37.1 - 50 16 DD 35 mm
KRIN89002 531 931 6 808 500 222.50 59.25 - 51 12 DD 35 mm
KRIN89003 532 183 6 808 529 226.77 39.9 - 49 11 DD 35 mm
KRIN89004 532 179 6 808 510 226.41 46.9 - 51 21 DD 35 mm
KRIN89005 532 411 6 808 570 233.03 44.35 - 47 20 DD 35 mm
KRIN89006 532 405 6 808 547 233.02 69.2 - 42 14 DD 35 mm
KRIN89007 531 302 6 808 230 237.65 47.55 - 50 10 DD 35 mm
KRIN89008 532 562 6 808 559 245.95 45.5 - 60 22 DD 35 mm
KRIN89009 531 298 6 808 211 237.13 62.5 - 50 10 DD 35 mm
KRIN89010 532 557 6 808 536 244.02 59.65 - 55 18 DD 35 mm
KRIN89011 531 977 6 808 092 217.95 40.45 - 50 15 DD 35 mm
KRIN89012 532 744 6 808 636 248.02 55.25 - 53 18 DD 35 mm
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 62
Hole_ID Easting
(m)
Northing
(m)
RL
(m) Total Depth
Dip
(°)
Azimuth
(°) Drill Type
Hole Size (mm)
KRIN89013 531 971 6 808 073 218.50 61.8 - 50 15 DD 35 mm
KRIN89014 532 738 6 808 612 254.73 60.3 - 50 15 DD 35 mm
KRIN89015 532 757 6 808 532 250.70 41.1 - 49 14 DD 35 mm
KRIN89016 532 753 6 808 501 249.01 46 - 60 12 DD 35 mm
KRIN89017 532 819 6 808 426 246.01 44.85 - 60 11 DD 35 mm
KRIN89018 532 745 6 808 465 247.25 67.4 - 58 13 DD 35 mm
KRIN89019 532 881 6 808 465 250.84 67.95 - 60 348 DD 35 mm
KRIN89020 532 979 6 808 402 247.34 38.6 - 60 8 DD 35 mm
KRIN89021 532 927 6 808 616 256.23 63.2 - 60 342 DD 35 mm
KRIN89022 532 728 6 808 559 252.34 101.65 - 49 8 DD 35 mm
KRIN89023 532 553 6 808 483 240.70 113.1 - 60 13 DD 35 mm
KRI12DD001 532 849 6 808 620 258.00 48.9 - 50 358 DD 42mm
KRI12DD002 532 853 6 808 578 253.77 77.55 - 50 347 DD 42mm
KRI12DD003 532 921 6 808 497 251.11 119.65 - 50 340 DD 42mm
KRI12DD004 532 826 6 808 446 247.95 80.6 - 50 23 DD 42mm
KRI12DD005 532 783 6 808 447 246.24 49.3 - 50 18 DD 42mm
KRI12DD006 532 798 6 808 494 248.93 127.35 - 50 29 DD 42mm
KRI12DD007 532 807 6 808 542 252.09 124.2 - 50 349 DD 42mm
KRI12DD008 532 758 6 808 560 253.82 101.6 - 49 12 DD 42mm
KRI12DD009 532 761 6 808 594 257.38 68.7 - 55 19 DD 42mm
KRI12DD010 532 818 6 808 583 255.52 94 - 50 7 DD 42mm
KRI12DD011 532 671 6 808 634 240.34 71.9 - 50 20 DD 42mm
KRI12DD012 532 622 6 808 635 240.28 54.1 - 50 15 DD 42mm
KRI12DD013 532 859 6 808 506 251.99 137.45 - 50 13 DD 42mm
KRI12DD014 532 662 6 808 574 252.41 113.5 - 50 15 DD 42mm
KRI12DD015 532 598 6 808 558 246.94 113.35 - 50 15 DD 42mm
KRI12DD016 532 631 6 808 480 248.69 184.5 - 50 22 DD 42mm
KRI12DD017 532 594 6 808 499 247.53 87.5 - 50 17 DD 42mm
KRI12DD018 532 583 6 808 461 243.66 145.1 - 50 7 DD 42mm
KRI12DD019 532 490 6 808 480 235.36 115.1 - 50 8 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD020 532 489 6 808 519 238.74 92.6 - 49 19 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD021 532 444 6 808 537 233.11 77.7 - 50 13 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD022 532 434 6 808 491 232.18 122.15 - 50 37 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD023 532 328 6 808 463 229.97 84.45 - 50 22 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD024 532 338 6 808 515 230.76 80.4 - 50 15 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD025 532 347 6 808 556 233.41 48.45 - 50 16 DD 42 mm
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 63
Hole_ID Easting
(m)
Northing
(m)
RL
(m) Total Depth
Dip
(°)
Azimuth
(°) Drill Type
Hole Size (mm)
KRI12DD026 532 277 6 808 484 227.80 79.2 - 50 11 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD027 532 265 6 808 435 230.32 118.2 - 50 17 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD028 532 231 6 808 507 227.40 62.9 - 50 14 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD029 532 218 6 808 452 226.72 86.8 - 50 15 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD030 532 171 6 808 464 226.56 83.25 - 50 16 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD031 532 120 6 808 473 226.33 83.6 - 50 15 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD032 532 132 6 808 530 225.68 40.4 - 51 13 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD033 532 086 6 808 537 224.88 49.4 - 49 16 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD034 532 072 6 808 493 225.23 74.55 - 49 13 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD035 532 037 6 808 547 224.00 41.9 - 49 15 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD036 532 024 6 808 499 225.96 71.6 - 50 14 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD037 532 386 6 808 500 231.31 98.55 - 49 13 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD038 532 456 6 808 583 233.41 41.5 - 46 30 DD 42 mm
KRI12DD039 532 754 6 808 531 250.64 111.9 - 50 14 DD 42 mm
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 64
SECTION 11 SAMPLE PREPARATION, ANALYSES, AND SECURITY
Historical sample preparation methods and quality control measures employed before dispatch of
samples to an analytical or testing laboratory have not been documented, nor the method or process
of sample splitting and reduction, nor the security measures taken to ensure the validity and integrity
of samples taken.
All samples were half-sectioned and submitted in geologically meaningful lengths. Paper records of
these are available to Woxna. All lengths quoted are down hole and not “true” widths.
At Kringelgruvan, 374 valid carbon and 52 valid sulphur analyses are presented in both paper and
database (.dbf) format. The laboratory that completed analysis of the Kringelgruvan samples was the
Government owned SGAB ANALYS, (Box 801, Luleå, Sweden 95128).
The laboratories that carried out the sampling and analytical work are independent of Woxna and
previous project vendors. No details of certification by any standards associations and the particulars
of any certification are known, however the laboratory was well regarded and applied best practice of
the day.
No detail of the nature, extent, and results of quality control procedures employed and quality
assurance actions taken have been provided. This being so, the resource is quoted as a historic
estimate.
Drill core from the 2012 program was logged at the Kringelgruvan mine site. Once geologically
logged, RQD measurements were taken. Core was then photographed, and magnetically measured
prior to storage on pallets at the mine site. Regular batches of samples were then sent via
independent contractor.
Flinders geologists Lars Dahlenborg, Elin Ryösä and Janne Kinnunen supervised sampling of all
holes drilled in 2012.
Samples intervals were marked on the core and the core tray. Each interval was given a unique
sample number. The sample numbers were taken from unique sample ticket booklets made for
Flinders. One part of the sample ticket was placed in the bag together with the cut core. The sample
numbers range from 26 700 to 28 300. A total of 92 blank samples were inserted at a rate of
approximately 1 in 15, resulting in approximately 7 % of the submitted samples being blanks.
The core was then shipped by truck to ALS in Piteå for core cutting. The core was split by diamond
saw and put back in the core tray by ALS. Subsequently Flinders’ staff, supervised by Elin Ryösä or
Lars Dahlenborg bagged the samples. One half of the core was placed in a numbered plastic bag
together with the corresponding sample ticket and the other half was left in the core tray. The core
was cut taking in consideration the main foliation/banding of the rock. When it was possible to
reassemble the core, the same half of the core was submitted for assay. The residual half of drill core
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 65
was viewed by Reed Leyton in the mine site. The mine site is a key access only facility, and there is
no evidence that samples have been disturbed in any way since cutting.
The plastic bags containing samples were then handed over to ALS Chemex preparation laboratory in
Piteå.
The rocks on the property are fresh with little or no secondary minerals on the surfaces that would
enhance metal values.
Cutting of core and dispatch to the ALS Chemex laboratory in Sweden is in keeping with industry
practice, and security of the delivery chain is more than adequate. All drilling and subsequent
sampling and assaying during the 2012 drilling program was completed by independent persons and
at no time was an officer, director or associate of Flinders involved.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 66
SECTION 12 DATA VERIFICATION
The adequacy, archiving and standard of the data presented is of sufficient quality for the reporting,
subject to qualification, of the historical drilling and resources as presented by previous project
owners.
Where possible, Flinders Resources Ltd has surveyed all drill collars by DGPS. The exception is the
drill collars now located in the bounds of the pit which were removed during mining. Position for these
drill holes has been calculated by converting the historic local grid into coordinates of RT90 and are
assumed accurate. The RT90 coordinates were further converted into SWEREF 99 TM by Tyréns in
January 2013.
Coffey Mining had transcribed paper records for collar, assay, survey and geology data, as reported
by Claesson et al. (1991, 1992, 1993), for Kringelgruvan and compared these to digital data available
to Woxna. Coffey Mining concluded that the historical data is of sufficient quality and traceable
provenance that it is useable as exploration data. The then supervising geologist, who is a QP under
current NI 43-101 protocol, also verified the provenance of the data supplied.
12.1 DRILL CORE
Twelve drill holes were examined in detail on 13 June 2012, at the Kringelgruvan mine site in Central
Sweden (Table 12-1).
Table 12-1: Drillholes and Core Examined by Reed Leyton Representative
Project Hole Number Approx Meters examined
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 40
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 30
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 35
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 60
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 95
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 100
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD001 42
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 110
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 120
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 90
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 60
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 90
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 67
All core trays were laid out separately on the examination tables, washed down, and checked.
The core lithology and mineralogy was checked visually against the available copies of original core
logs for verification. No discrepancies were noted. Analytical result sheets were also checked against
the actual core and the core logs (to check sample locations).
Core sections of interest were photographed.
12.2 CHECK SAMPLING
The majority of the core examined had been previously cut by diamond saw into halves, and some
sections quartered. Many original sample intervals had been noted on the actual wooden core trays,
and occasionally on the core remnant itself.
It was decided to re-sample core lengths as close to the original lengths as possible for direct
comparison.
The re-sampling included 59 samples (Table 12-2). The core trays selected for re-sampling were
taken to the Flinders core saw facility by a Flinders field assistant, and quarter-core (as appropriate
and available) sections were re-sawn for the check samples.
Reed Leyton checked that the correct samples were taken, sawn, and the resulting sample bulks
were placed in individual sample bags with an identifying tag. The bags were sealed with a plastic tie.
The bags were retained under Reed Leyton’s supervision, and personally delivered to the ALS
Chemex laboratory manager (Tony Ökvist) at Öjebyn (Sweden) for further processing and transport.
Table 12-2: Check Sample Intervals by Reed Leyton Representative
Project Hole
Number
Check
Sample
From (m)
Check
Sample
To (m)
Check
Sample
Interval (m)
Check
Sample
Number
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 4.75 6.75 2 27 796
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 8.75 10.75 2 27 797
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 13.75 15.75 2 27 798
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 15.75 17.75 2 27 799
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 19.75 21.75 2 27 801
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 21.75 24.05 2.3 27 802
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 8.05 10.05 2 27 803
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 10.05 12.05 2 27 804
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 14.3 15.35 1.05 27 805
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 21 22.4 1.4 27 806
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 22.4 24.6 2.2 27 807
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 68
Project Hole
Number
Check
Sample
From (m)
Check
Sample
To (m)
Check
Sample
Interval (m)
Check
Sample
Number
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 7.45 8.45 1 27 808
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 9.05 10.4 1.35 27 809
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 19.25 20.4 1.15 27 810
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 21.85 23.85 2 27 812
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 30.4 32.4 2 27 813
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 32.4 34.4 2 27 814
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 38.7 40.7 2 27 815
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 40.7 42.7 2 27 816
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 10 11.2 1.2 27 817
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 12.2 14.2 2 27 818
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 72.4 74.4 2 27 819
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 74.4 76.4 2 27 820
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 79.35 79.9 0.55 27 822
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 82 84 2 27 823
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 87.2 88.3 1.1 27 824
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 88.3 90.3 2 27 825
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 96 98 2 27 826
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 98 100 2 27 827
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD001 14 15 1 27 828
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD001 23.4 24.2 0.8 27 829
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD001 43.5 44.5 1 27 830
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 49 50 1 27 831
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 57 58 1 27 860
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 93.5 94.5 1 27 833
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 94.5 95.5 1 27 834
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 103.8 104.8 1 27 835
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 104.8 105.8 1 27 836
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 68.1 69.1 1 27 837
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 74.6 75.6 1 27 838
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 79.4 80.4 1 27 839
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 113.6 114.6 1 27 841
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 116.6 117.6 1 27 842
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 59.75 60.75 1 27 843
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 62.75 63.75 1 27 844
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 70.1 71.1 1 27 845
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 72 73 1 27 846
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 69
Project Hole
Number
Check
Sample
From (m)
Check
Sample
To (m)
Check
Sample
Interval (m)
Check
Sample
Number
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 80.75 81.75 1 27 847
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 43.8 44.8 1 27 848
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 48.8 49.8 1 27 849
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 49.8 50.8 1 27 851
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 52.8 53.8 1 27 852
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 57.8 58.4 0.6 27 853
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 35.15 36.15 1 27 854
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 40.4 41.4 1 27 855
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 43.4 44.4 1 27 856
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 53.5 54.5 1 27 857
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 59.7 60.7 1 27 858
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 82.6 83.6 1 27 859
12.3 CHECK ANALYSES
No information exists on check analyses from historical operators of the project. Check sampling by
Flinders Resources has consisted of crush duplicates and pulp duplicates. Greater than 10 % of each
batch sent to ALS Chemex has been composed of these duplicates.
All QA/QC data for this Project has been deemed acceptable for the purposes of the Mineral
Resource estimation.
0
5
10
15
20
0 5 10 15 20
C_Duplicates
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 70
Figure 12-1: Coarse Duplicate Data for Cg
Figure 12-2: Pulp Duplicate Data for Cg
The paired plots in Figure 12-1 and Figure 12-2 demonstrate high degree of correlation between
Parent data (Vertical axis) and duplicate data (Horizontal axis). Blue lines provide 1 to 1 correlation
trend.
12.4 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Final results were received via direct email from ALS Chemex on 18 June 2012. Both the raw data
and the analysis certificate were received. Table 12-3 shows the analysis values for Cg only,
comparing the original sample interval and value versus the check sample interval and value. There is
extremely good agreement between the individual samples.
Table 12-3: Drill Core Re-sampled for Check Analysis, Matched with Original Assays
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Original Data
Interval
(m)
Original Data
Cg
(%)
Check
Sample
Number
Check
Data
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 4.75 6.75 2 16.3 27 796 12.25
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 8.75 10.75 2 15.7 27 797 13.05
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 13.75 15.75 2 13.7 27 798 10.35
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 15.75 17.75 2 10.2 27 799 8.79
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 19.75 21.75 2 6 27 801 5.31
0
5
10
15
20
0 5 10 15 20
P Duplicates
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 71
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Original Data
Interval
(m)
Original Data
Cg
(%)
Check
Sample
Number
Check
Data
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 21.75 24.05 2.3 4.3 27 802 3.49
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 8.05 10.05 2 13.1 27 803 10.95
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 10.05 12.05 2 5.1 27 804 5.72
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 14.3 15.35 1.05 7.5 27 805 4.95
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 21 22.4 1.4 5.1 27 806 4.29
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 22.4 24.6 2.2 5 27 807 4.66
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 7.45 8.45 1 3.5 27 808 2.87
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 9.05 10.4 1.35 4.8 27 809 4.73
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 19.25 20.4 1.15 3.6 27 810 2.67
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 21.85 23.85 2 4.6 27 812 4.17
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 30.4 32.4 2 12.5 27 813 12.25
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 32.4 34.4 2 13.5 27 814 10.55
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 38.7 40.7 2 5.7 27 815 4.76
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 40.7 42.7 2 6.1 27 816 5.09
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 10 11.2 1.2 3.4 27 817 3.06
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 12.2 14.2 2 5.5 27 818 5.13
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 72.4 74.4 2 9.4 27 819 8.87
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 74.4 76.4 2 10.8 27 820 9.24
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 79.35 79.9 0.55 - 27 822 1.1
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 82 84 2 8.6 27 823 7.86
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 87.2 88.3 1.1 6.1 27 824 5.17
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 88.3 90.3 2 9.9 27 825 8.35
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 96 98 2 7.5 27 826 6.25
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 98 100 2 9.9 27 827 9.55
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD001 14 15 1 8.77 27 828 8.51
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD001 23.4 24.2 0.8 2.68 27 829 2.52
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD001 43.5 44.5 1 1.77 27 830 1.41
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 49 50 1 5.54 27 831 5.77
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 57 58 1 14.15 27 860 14.65
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 93.5 94.5 1 9.28 27 833 8.8
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 94.5 95.5 1 4.72 27 834 5.12
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 103.8 104.8 1 3.88 27 835 4.47
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 104.8 105.8 1 5.34 27 836 5.98
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 68.1 69.1 1 12.4 27 837 12.65
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 74.6 75.6 1 0.05 27 838 <0.01
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 72
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Original Data
Interval
(m)
Original Data
Cg
(%)
Check
Sample
Number
Check
Data
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 79.4 80.4 1 6.8 27 839 8.17
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 113.6 114.6 1 2.22 27 841 2.05
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 116.6 117.6 1 4.62 27 842 4.61
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 59.75 60.75 1 6.44 27 843 7.75
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 62.75 63.75 1 7.98 27 844 8.79
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 70.1 71.1 1 2.08 27 845 2.79
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 72 73 1 7.93 27 846 7.99
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 80.75 81.75 1 4.13 27 847 4.57
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 43.8 44.8 1 7.6 27 848 7.49
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 48.8 49.8 1 11.6 27 849 12.8
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 49.8 50.8 1 8.65 27 851 9.56
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 52.8 53.8 1 5.66 27 852 5.77
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 57.8 58.4 0.6 3.97 27 853 4.03
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 35.15 36.15 1 11.7 27 854 13.1
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 40.4 41.4 1 7.64 27 855 7.39
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 43.4 44.4 1 4.05 27 856 4.16
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 53.5 54.5 1 6.49 27 857 6.95
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 59.7 60.7 1 3.82 27 858 4.21
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 82.6 83.6 1 3.34 27 859 3.43
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 73
Figure 12-3: Paired Historical and Modern Analytical Data for Cg
The paired plots in Figure 12-3 demonstrate high degree of correlation between historical data
(Horizontal axis) and modern data (Vertical axis). Blue lines provide 1 to 1 correlation trend.
12.5 DENSITY
A total of 1423 bulk density determinations have been completed with a range of values between 2.35
t/m3 and 3.67 t/m3. The majority of determinations range from 2.6 t/m3 to 2.8 t/m3 (Figure 12-4).
Reed Leyton has also divided the 1 423 bulk density determination by domain (Figure 12-5 and
Figure 12-6). The density determinations were calculated wet and dry weight volume determinations.
Figure 12 confirms that the majority of the determinations average 2.7 t/m3. The average for the
waste rock determinations was 2.7 t/m3.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 74
Figure 12-4: All 1 424 Bulk Density Determinations
Figure 12-5: Domain ‘HG’ 376 Bulk Density Determinations
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 75
Figure 12-6: Domain ‘GRF’ 540 Bulk Density Determinations
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 76
SECTION 13 MINERAL TESTING AND PROCESSING
A significant amount of test work was carried out for the Woxna graphite deposit prior to construction,
including pilot plant work in 1992/3. However, the current plant is substantially different to the pilot
plant and the initial production plant. In addition, a variety of laboratory and plant trials were
performed during the life of the mine, however, GBM found only a few reports in the mine’s archives.
In addition to these reports there are process reports which relate to audits of the production and
recommendations on changing the process.
After reviewing the historical production reports including grades and size analyses of the graphite
concentrates sold, it was decided that further test work was required to assess whether it is possible
to improve the grade and increase the flake size of the products as these improvements would
significantly increase the price of the products.
13.1 RECENT TEST WORK
13.1.1 CONCENTRATE DEWATERING TESTS
Outotec was commissioned to complete concentrate dewatering test work in 2012 to support the
dewatering plant design. The test material was created using a fine graphite concentrate product
sample from the historical product which is stockpiled at Woxna. The results of this test work indicate
that thickening is not viable and that pressure filtration in horizontal or vertical filters yield filter cake
moisture contents of 22 % and 20 % respectively.
13.1.2 AMINPRO TESTS
In January to June 2013 a major test work programme was under taken by Amelunxen Mineral
Processing Ltd. (Aminpro) in Chile to reassess the process. Using the historical process as a basis,
GBM and Aminpro designed a test work programme to explore the various optimisations considered
pertinent to the plant design with the objectives of increasing the coarse flake recovery, overall plant
recovery and product grade. The key areas tests were:
Bond Work Index on feed and assessment of regrinding parameters
Rougher flotation tests to assess variables such as reagents, reagent dosage, % solids, pH
and grind
Rougher kinetic tests with screen analyses using optimum conditions
Contact cell tests
Cleaner flotation kinetic tests including grind size, pH, % solids, redox, reagent addition
points, column parameters
Rougher flotation and mineralogy variability
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 77
Locked cycle flotation tests
Microscopy in the form of mineral liberation analysis
Settling tests on tailings
Magnetic separation test work on graphite concentrate.
The test description and results are reported in the Flinders Resources Woxna-Graphite Metallurgical
Test Work and Front End Engineering Program by Roger Amelunxen.
13.1.3 SAMPLES USED IN THE AMINPRO TESTS
Two types of samples were taken from the Woxna deposit; bulk hand samples from pits in the
mineralised zone and selected intervals from core samples. Initially two bulk hand samples were
taken from a pit where the drilling had indicated that the rock was above cut-off grade. One was to
represent marginal grade ROM material and the second higher grade material. However, the ROM
sample (ROM#1) assayed only 3.3 % C (ROM is expected to be approximately 10 % C) so this was
only used for the initial tests, such as comminution and rougher flotation. The high grade sample was
handpicked in the laboratory to produce high and low grade samples. The high grade sample was
combined with some of the ROM#1 sample to form a composite, COMPO#1, with a grade, 9 % C,
approximating to the expected ROM grade. A third sample, ROM#2, was taken from another area to
provide a single sample which had a grade, 12.2 % C, approximating to the expected ROM grade.
ROM#2 was used for detailed tests including the locked cycle flotation tests.
Intervals of drill core were selected by Monte Carlo method to represent the mineralised body.
Rougher tests were carried out on these 20 intervals, and ten of these had mineralogy carried out on
them. In addition, the work index for each sample was estimated.
13.1.4 SUMMARY OF AMINPRO TEST RESULTS
The Bond Work Index of the sample was 18.5 kWh/t and for cleaner feed material greater than 40
kWh/t, dependent on the graphite grade. This confirms historical reports.
Rougher flotation tested at varying levels of grind, using MIBC as the sole collector, indicated that:
Graphite and gangue (silicates) are the coarsest components of the sample with iron
sulphides (mainly pyrrhotite) being present as fines.
Graphite floated very fast with good recoveries (>95 %) in all tests. Gangue and iron
sulphides had lower recoveries and flotation speeds.
Flash flotation in roughers should be considered to capture as coarse a flake product as
possible and that the finer graphite would be recovered in the scavengers.
In testing other variables in the roughers, the following was observed
No effect was observed on graphite recovery and grade when varying the feed %
solids
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 78
No significant effect was seen in varying the pH
No positive effect occurred in testing other reagents (diesel, Lila Flot GS13 and
Aerofroth 88 were compared to MIBC).
Contact cell tests on rougher feed gave good results with regard to recovery, but failed to produce
high (above 90 % C) concentrate grades.
Microscopy (Mineral Liberation Analyser) and liberation studies on the variability samples found that
in the majority of the samples muscovite minerals were locked with the graphite flakes, possibly
preventing upgrading concentrates in the cleaner stage without further regrind. It showed that
between 14 % and 20% of the graphite was locked. This finding was confirmed with additional MLA
tests on a concentrate sample. This MLA also confirmed the results of previous MLA completed on
ten geological samples in 2012 which nine samples had muscovite values of between 10.3 % and
25.6 %.
The following conclusions were reached for the cleaner flotation:
Regrinding was necessary to achieve higher grades.
Flotation at low densities was found very important.
Use of dispersants was seen to help depression of gangue.
Concentrate grades with above 90 % C were achieved in a number of tests aimed at developing the
cleaner circuit configuration, at the optimised conditions.
A locked cycle test was performed at optimised flotation conditions requiring seven cycles to achieve
stability and equilibrium. The overall graphite recovery obtained for the ROM#2 sample, with a head
grade of 12.2 % C, was above 96 % while producing concentrate grades above 93 % C.
Approximately 12 % of the feed mass was recovered as concentrate. Of the 12 %, 5.3 % reported into
the rougher cleaners and the rest into the rougher-scavenger cleaners. The products of the locked
cycle test were screened showing that over 18% of the concentrate reported to the +250 µm size
assaying 95 % graphite and over 39 % of the concentrate reported in the +180 µm size assaying over
94 % graphite.
The assay results of the tests with size are shown in Table 14-7.
Table 13-1: Results of the Locked Cycle Flotation Tests
Size fraction µm
Rougher cleaners concentrate
Rougher-scavenger cleaners concentrate
Combine concentrate
% retained % C % retained % C % retained % C
+250 13.9 95 22.0 95 18.4 95
+180 -250 18.8 97 23.4 92 21.4 94
+100 -180 26.5 94 29.6 91 28.3 92
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 79
Size fraction µm
Rougher cleaners concentrate
Rougher-scavenger cleaners concentrate
Combine concentrate
% retained % C % retained % C % retained % C
-100 40.8 89 25.0 87 31.9 88
Figure 13-1: Locked Cycle Flotation Test Diagram
Settling and rheology tests were carried out on a tailings sample to assess the potential for thickening
the final tailings before pumping to the TSF. The following conclusions were reached from these tests:
16 g/t of SNF 2070 flocculant is required to achieve a settling rate of 0.15 m².d/t
Thickened tailings will be between 65 % and 68 % solids to allow pumping by horizontal type
pumps.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 80
SECTION 14 MINERAL RESOURCE ESTIMATES
The Mineral Resources estimated and disclosed herein supersede the Historic Mineral Resources as
quoted in Section 6 above and apply current practices and assumptions.
14.1 RESOURCE DATA
14.1.1 DRILLING DATA
Ninety two (92) diamond drill holes totalling 6 581 m, drilled into the Kringelgruvan area in 1988, 1989
and 2012.
Data relating to the collar locations, drill collar orientations and drill hole surveys were sighted by the
Geoff Reed in sections and plans of the day. Individual hard copy data of down hole surveys or
assays were sighted.
Geoff Reed inspected the area with Woxna’s personnel and was able to locate many 2012 drill hole
collars, and selected 1988 and1989 collars.
The profile spacing is approximately 50m and distance between holes on section is generally 50m.
Most holes are dipping 50 degrees. Hole lengths are typically be around 100m, resulting in a vertical
depth test of around 80m. Shorter holes were drilled where the graphite was intersected close to
surface. Hole numbering starts with the abbreviation KRI followed by the year (12) and ends with a
continuous hole number from KRI12001 to KRI12041.
Half of the drill holes have been deviation surveyed to date. The start azimuth was measured with a
hand held compass. Any uncertainty in drill hole trend cause by the lack of surveys is considered
minor at the spacing of the drill holes and relatively short hole length in relation to a scale of the
resource.
DGPS surveying was conducted by Tyréns in January 2013. Where possible, Flinders has surveyed
all drill collars by DGPS. The exception is the drill collars now located in the bounds of the pit which
were removed during mining. Position for these drill holes has been calculated by converting the
historic local grid into coordinates of SWEREF99 and are assumed accurate.
All drill core for Ninety two (92) diamond drill holes has been located by Woxna’s staff in Woxna,
Sweden. Core from 12 holes has been inspected by the Geoff Reed.
Ninety two (92) diamond drill holes were included in the current mineral resource estimation.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 81
Table 14-1: Kringelgruvan Drilling Database Summary
Hole Type Drill Series Drill Number Drill Meters Resource Intersection
Meters
DD 88 28 1 595 512.2
DD 89 23 1 313 284.9
DD 12 41 3 673 960.5
Total 92 6 581 1757.6
14.1.2 DATABASE INTEGRITY
Capture of digital data was completed by the Issuer’s staff. Hard copy data has been verified and all
data is stored in a database and managed by the Issuer.
Drilling data from drill programs were transferred in digital format by the Issuer’s staff.
Digital data has been both randomly and systematically checked by Reed Leyton and shown to be
correct using a number of checks listed below. Assay data in original laboratory sheets has not been
sighted from the 1988,1989 drilling program.
The digital data was compiled directly into Microsoft Excel by the Issuer, validated in Microsoft Access
and exported into a csv format. The database was then imported into Maptek Vulcan software in the
csv format.
The database for Kringelgruvan was attributed to Ninety two (92) drill holes, which provided the
verified information for compositing (specifically the collar, survey, lithology and assay tables). The
database included drill holes with recorded collar elevation. This database was named viersh.vih.isis.
14.1.3 DRILL SPACING
Ninety two (92) drill holes for 6 581 m of diamond drilling were drilled at Kringelgruvan, 90 drill holes
intersected mineralisation and were subsequently assayed.
Hole spacing was completed on a 50 m x 50 m drill pattern.
For wire framing purposes 90 degrees strike was considered the optimal orientation. Strike of
mineralisation varied from 80 degrees to 100 degrees
Polygons were created every 50 m through the ninety 90 resource drill holes at the project.
14.1.4 DRILLING ORIENTATION
Holes have been drilled mostly at two orientations 16 degrees and 348 degrees at Kringelgruvan.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 82
Due to the amount of drilling and orientation, the true thickness is generally considered to be
70 % of drilled thickness.
The likelihood that mineralisation is developed in an orientation other than that interpreted is
considered to be low.
14.1.5 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Core drilled were sampled and analysed by ICP method at the laboratory of SGAB ANALYS,
(Box 801, Luleå, Sweden 95128).
A total of 374 samples from 50 drill holes were analysed in total at Kringelgruvan for diamond drill
holes with the current resource estimation.
The method applied by was the standard for the industry of the day, and although no quality
assurance data is available, it is considered to be of a very high quality.
A total of 1433 samples from 41 drill holes were analysed in total at Kringelgruvan for diamond drill
holes with the current resource estimation.
Core drilled were sampled and analysed by ICP method at the laboratory of ALS Chemex, Pitea. Sweden.
The method applied is to current industry standards, and although no standard data is available, it is
considered to be of a very high quality.
14.1.6 SAMPLE LENGTH
All holes drilled at Kringelgruvan were sampled with an average of one (1) m intervals. Check
sampling by Woxna at the request of Reed Leyton used identical sample intervals.
Composites of the drill hole assays are generated using Maptek Vulcan software with run lengths of
1 m.
These composites honour the geological wireframes. Checking was undertaken by generating an Isis
file and visually inspecting the result of the composite.
Specific components of the compositing include:
Run Lengths of 1 m;
Data Field C_pct was composited;
The composite file was then applied a tag for each composite with the character
(a2, a3, a6, a9, a13, a14, c01-c03, c05-c06, c08-c19) in the ‘bound’ column. This new
composite isis file was called viersa.cmp.isis and used in the estimation process.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 83
Figure 14-1: Histogram of Raw Sample Lengths for Kringelgruvan
14.1.7 RELATIVE DENSITY
Using the bulk density (“BD”) density default function of Vulcan, the variable BD was populated.
The value 2.7 was run according to density test work by Woxna previously attributed to various
assays within the geology database. The author of the Reed Leyton report has created a file with an
average BD taken between various C % grades within the resource and waste blocks outside the
resource.
14.1.8 GEOLOGICAL MODEL
Mineral Resources has been calculated by Reed Leyton on the bearing of 90 degree strike.
The project was drilled within an area approximately 1 200 m x 100 m to 200 m.
The mineralisation was intersected on all the drilling sections and is so far known to at least a depth of
150 m below the surface.
Mineralisation is present as a six main mineralised bodies and eleven smaller mineralised bodies. The
six main grade domains were defined using a lower cut-off grade of 7 % Cg while a broader outer
domain used the lithology code FGRF. The other eleven smaller mineralized bodies were defined
using the lithology code FGRF. The thickness in the section of the plane was usually more than 10m,
but varied between 5 m and a little more than 15 m.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 84
One block model were constructed, named vie_woxna_apr2013_75.bmf. The parameters used in the
setup file vieuncutivdcpct1_10sep.bef for Kringelgruvan.
The block model was created using the one bdf file, vie_woxna_apr2013_75.bdf. This original block
model contained only default values except for the variable domain, which was populated in relation
to the wireframes in which the blocks resided in.
A rotation of 90 Bearing, 0 Plunge and 0 Dip was applied.
Parent block size was 5 m x 25 m x 5 m with sub blocks at 1.25 m x 5 m x 1.25 m.
An offset of 1 500 m x 600 m x 400 m was applied.
The variables include the type and their default values before estimation.
Figure 14-2: Mineral Resource Cross Section, Kringelgruvan
14.1.9 WIRE FRAMING
Using the above drill hole data, wire framing of the geological boundaries were performed by joining
digitised section outlines at 50 m spacing.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 85
The digitised sections are snapped to drill holes within +/-25 m influence using above 7 % C for the 10
high grade wireframe domains at Kringelgruvan.
The digitised sections are snapped to drill holes within +/-25 m influence using the mineralized
boundary as the low grade wireframe domains boundary limit at Kringelgruvan.
Vertical plane sections were digitised at 12 degree and 348 degree orientation at 50 m spacing. There
is sufficient evidence for continuity of the mineralised envelope between sections.
All modelled wireframes were checked in plan, cross section, long section and 3D rotated views
All geological wireframes were checked for crossing, inconsistencies and closure.
All wireframes were updated too match the new drillhole collar coordinates and the adjusted
mineralization data points.
Table 14-2: Kringelgruvan ‘hg’ Domain (above 7 % Cg) and ‘grf’ Domain (lith code FGRF)
‘hg’ Domain ‘grf’ Domain
a2, a3, a6, a9, a13, a14 c01-c03, c05-c06, c08-c19
Table 14-3: Kringelgruvan Domain Volume Validation
Domain Wireframes Volume Model Volume Domains
a02 293 653 291 865 99 %
a03 237 686 232 627 98 %
a06 591 542 559 453 95 %
a09 181 821 177 109 97 %
a13 53 299 52 139 98 %
a14 6 789 6 787 100 %
c01 44 915 44 834 100 %
c02 476 361 475 010 100 %
c03 598 359 589 014 98 %
c05 58 427 56 729 97 %
c06 1 397 402 1 401 015 100 %
c08 174 655 174 629 100 %
c09 517 768 514 478 99 %
c10 26 177 26 406 101 %
c11 27 350 27 207 99 %
c12 2 457 2 432 99 %
c13 72 825 72 157 99 %
c14 14 587 14 661 101 %
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 86
c16 3 938 3 818 97 %
c17 7 282 7 363 101 %
c18 10 177 10 264 101 %
c19 5 417 5 195 96 %
Total 4 802 886 4 745 191 99 %
Figure 14-3: Mineral Resource Cross Section, Kringelgruvan
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 87
14.1.10 GRADE INTERPOLATION
Grade interpolation was undertaken using inverse distance defined by the domain wireframes. The
allocations of composites were calculated using a hard boundary at the domain wireframes.
Using Maptek Vulcan’s Estimation Editor the grade estimation was run for Kringelgruvan. Variables
were populated using one single search ellipses with no cutoff to the mineralised domains.
Constant parameters used in this block estimation file, vieuncutivdcpct_1to10sep.bef include:
The grade variable populated was C_uncut. The default given was 0
The number of samples used was populated in the variable numsam. The default given
to this variable was 0
The number of drillholes used was stored in nodrill. The default given was 0
The sample distance used was stored in the variable samdis
The weighted average anisotropic distance to the samples used was populated in the
variable samdis
The inverse distance method was applied.
Table 14-4: Block Model Parameters for Kringelgruvan
Variables Description
c_uncut Carbon grade - reportable
s_uncut Sulphur grade – not reportable
nnp_uncut Nnp grade – not reportable
bd Bulk Density
category Resource category by script
mintype Mineralisation Domain
nodrill Number of Drill holes
samdis Average sample distance
numsam Number of samples
pass Estimation flag
type Air or fresh rock
mined Mined or insitu
lithtype Graphite Pegmatite Metasediment Overburden
rsc_cat Final Resource Category meas = 1, ind = 2, inf = 3, additional min = 4.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 88
Table 14-5: Search Parameters for Kringelgruvan
Pass Min Sample Max Sample Distance
1 2 12 70
2 1 20 140
3 1 30 400
Table 14-6: Estimation Parameters for Kringelgruvan
Domain Strike Plunge Dip Major Minor Semi Major Discretisation
A2, A3, A6, A9, A13, A14 82 0 0 4 1 2 2x:4y:2z
C01-3, C05-6, C08-19 82 0 0 4 1 2 2x:4y:2z
14.1.11 MINIMUM WIDTH
No minimum width has been applied in the estimation of the Kringelgruvan Mineral Resources.
14.1.12 CUT-OFF GRADE
A cut-off grade of 7 % Cg has been applied to the Mineral Resource estimation.
14.1.13 ADDITIONAL VARIABLES
Once the estimations had run, a number of additional variables were added or calculated. These
variables included:
The category variable, category. A script, resourcecatflagged.bcf was run on the block
model. This script looked at the nearest neighbour distance variable (“samdis”). If samdis
was >0, then the category variable was set to inf (inferred). This variable was used to
classify the resource.
The category variable, called rsc_cat. A calculation, rev_rsccat1_2_3_4.bcf was run on the
block model. This calculation looked at the previous script run. This variable was used to
classify the resource based on drilling density, continuity and general confidence in each
modeled wireframe.
Using the BD density calculation function of Vulcan the variable bd was populated. The
script was run according to density test work by Woxna previously attributed to various
assays within the geology database. Reed Leyton has created a script file with an average
BD taken between various C grades.
14.1.14 MINING ASSUMPTIONS
No assumptions have been made as to future mining methods, dimensions or dilution.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 89
14.1.15 METALLURGICAL ASSUMPTIONS
No assumptions have been made as to the metallurgical behaviour of mineralization.
14.2 MINERAL RESOURCE ESTIMATE
This Mineral Resource estimate has been prepared in accordance with the CIM Definition Standards
of June 2011(became law) or 27 November 2010 (published). The classification of the resource at the
appropriate levels of confidence are considered appropriate on the basis of drill hole spacing, sample
interval, geological interpretation and all currently available assay data.
The Kringelgruvan Mineral Resource, quoted to the appropriate level of confidence, is provided in
Table 14-7.
Table 14-7: Kringelgruvan Mineral Resource Estimate @ 7 % Cut-Off
Classification TONNES
(Mt)
Grade
Cg
%
Measured 0.99 10.68
Indicated 1.86 10.63
Total 2.85 10.65
The above numbers are literal, whereas the accuracy of the techniques requires that the estimates’
parameters should actually result in rounded figures to better reflect the order of accuracy. Hence
Reed Leyton has rounded the mineralisation tonnage to the nearest ten thousand tonnes. The
resource estimates then become as shown on Table 14-8.
Table 14-8: Rounded Kringelgruvan Mineral Resource Estimate @ 7 % Cut-Off
Classification TONNES
(Mt)
Grade
Cg
%
Measured 1.0 10.7
Indicated 1.8 10.7
Total 2.8 10.7
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 90
14.3 DISCUSSION
The Kringelgruvan Mineral Resource describes four main bodies of mineralization separated by
faulting drilled within an area approximately 1 200 m x 100 m to 200 m. The lithology logging of
graphite has been selected to best represent the margin of the mineralised body.
The sample spacing is approximately 50 m x 20 m x 1.0 m. No mining parameters are attached.
The mineralization remains open laterally and at depth.
14.4 NI 43-101 COMPLIANCE
Following the enclosed audit of historical data, Flinders data, the compiled Flinders drilling database,
and the subsequent calculation of Mineral Resources, the quoted Mineral Resources at
Kringelgruvan are subdivided into CIM-compliant measured and indicated categories on the basis of
the close density of drilling, checked grades and inter-hole continuity.
It is the opinion of Reed Leyton that this Mineral Resource estimate for Kringelgruvan satisfies the
definitions of Measured and Indicated Mineral Resources as per the CIM Definition Standards of
November 2010.
Table 14-9: Kringelgruvan Graphite Combined Resource Grade and Cumulative Tonnage at Various Cut-Off Grades
Cut-off Grade (%) Measured and Indicated
Resource (Mt) Grade Cg (%)
Contained Graphite (tonnes)
2 5.7 7.4 424 490
3 5.1 8.0 408 160
4 4.3 8.8 381 973
5 3.8 9.5 355 852
6 3.1 10.4 318 217
7.0 (Base Case) 2.8 10.7 303 509
8 2.6 10.9 286 613
9 2.3 11.3 255 508
10 1.8 11.7 214 418
Table 14-10: Kringelgruvan – Drill holes and Intervals Used in Resource Calculation
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Interval
(m)
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD026 60.4 71 10.6 10.72
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD026 71 71.05 0.05 7.24
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 91
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Interval
(m)
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD027 96 96.05 0.05 10.50
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD027 96.05 103 6.95 10.45
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD028 36.5 40.1 3.6 5.21
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD029 68.7 76.95 8.25 11.05
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD030 58.95 75.5 16.55 10.56
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD031 59.05 66.55 7.5 11.23
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD032 19.95 33.9 13.95 11.46
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD033 26.3 37.6 11.3 10.57
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD034 51.65 59.45 7.8 14.53
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD035 23.3 26.9 3.6 10.21
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD036 44.1 61.75 17.65 8.97
Kringelgruvan KRIN89003 11.824 22.8 10.976 9.68
Kringelgruvan KRIN89004 25.4 35.9 10.5 16.02
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD015 27.4 36.1 8.7 11.31
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD017 80.3 81.9 1.6 11.12
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD018 106.2 120.1 13.9 10.94
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD019 93 101.8 8.8 13.84
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD020 67.4 71.4 4 11.95
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD021 49 53.25 4.25 11.00
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD022 101.8 104.5 2.7 11.75
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD024 42.35 50.5 8.15 10.99
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD025 16.4 22.4 6 11.01
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD037 62.5 69.35 6.85 11.27
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD038 14.9 19.482 4.582 11.18
Kringelgruvan KRIN89005 16.1 21.1 5 9.27
Kringelgruvan KRIN89006 34.1 37.1 3 13.73
Kringelgruvan KRIN89008 13.5 31.5 18 11.51
Kringelgruvan KRIN89010 38.1 50 11.9 12.81
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 88.3 100 11.7 11.89
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD001 9.2 15.4 6.2 10.70
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD002 41.201 46.15 4.949 11.97
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 89.5 108 18.5 7.53
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD006 88.7 92.7 4 14.85
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD006 115.8 125.8 10 6.49
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 68.1 73.1 5 12.31
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 90.5 93.5 3 11.00
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 60.75 74 13.25 7.48
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 92
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Interval
(m)
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 43.8 57.8 14 8.84
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 35.15 42.4 7.25 11.23
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD011 32.45 37.45 5 8.34
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD012 38.7 42.7 4 9.45
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD013 105.45 115.1 9.65 6.61
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD014 83.05 91.5 8.45 8.61
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD015 97.85 103.85 6 7.90
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD016 156.6 163.1 6.5 9.83
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD039 76.6 84.85 8.25 9.55
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 60.6 75.948 15.348 10.48
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD041 46 46.25 0.25 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD041 46.25 72.2 25.95 7.65
Kringelgruvan KRIN88007 72.3 75 2.7 17.81
Kringelgruvan KRIN88007 75 77.7 2.7 9.56
Kringelgruvan KRIN88010 8.95 15.95 7 11.70
Kringelgruvan KRIN88011 8.1 24.45 16.35 11.33
Kringelgruvan KRIN88013 5.8 14.25 8.45 7.62
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 4.75 19.75 15 11.97
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 6.425 15.35 8.925 8.30
Kringelgruvan KRIN88016 29.5 42.4 12.9 10.30
Kringelgruvan KRIN88018 5.65 9.65 4 11.35
Kringelgruvan KRIN88019 33.5 34.7 1.2 8.20
Kringelgruvan KRIN88019 34.7 45.7 11 4.87
Kringelgruvan KRIN88019 45.7 49.7 4 11.20
Kringelgruvan KRIN88020 30.8 39.1 8.3 13.68
Kringelgruvan KRIN88021 58.9 64.9 6 13.70
Kringelgruvan KRIN88022 79.1 84 4.9 8.31
Kringelgruvan KRIN88023 23.5 29.1 5.6 6.91
Kringelgruvan KRIN88024 58.8 63.2 4.4 4.68
Kringelgruvan KRIN88026 67.9 75.5 7.6 12.10
Kringelgruvan KRIN89012 12.85 26.6 13.75 9.40
Kringelgruvan KRIN89014 33.95 49.1 15.15 7.96
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 28.4 34.4 6 14.13
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 72.4 84 11.6 9.39
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 50 62.6 12.6 12.34
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD006 35.8 38.1 2.3 9.08
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD013 18.3 36.9 18.6 7.99
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 93
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Interval
(m)
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 14.362 16.5 2.138 0.04
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 16.5 21.613 5.113 0.11
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD041 23.35 34 10.65 12.49
Kringelgruvan KRIN88001 12 20 8 9.83
Kringelgruvan KRIN88002 27.343 32.15 4.807 9.02
Kringelgruvan KRIN88003 16.2 17.2 1 7.70
Kringelgruvan KRIN88004 9.087 17.55 8.463 12.47
Kringelgruvan KRIN88005 15.65 27.5 11.85 12.31
Kringelgruvan KRIN88006 3.474 5.233 1.759 13.48
Kringelgruvan KRIN88007 3.684 3.996 0.312 12.30
Kringelgruvan KRIN88007 3.996 9.038 5.042 13.64
Kringelgruvan KRIN88017 14.8 21.95 7.15 13.49
Kringelgruvan KRIN88019 5.114 5.213 0.099 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88027 25.1 37.4 12.3 12.40
Kringelgruvan KRIN88028 16.2 33.5 17.3 6.92
Kringelgruvan KRIN89019 47.9 51.7 3.8 10.02
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD019 72 87.3 15.3 12.38
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD020 49.5 58.5 9 12.01
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD013 62.1 65.15 3.05 10.08
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 21.65 22.679 1.029 7.87
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 22.679 23.65 0.971 8.36
Kringelgruvan KRIN89001 17.4 25.7 8.3 4.65
Kringelgruvan KRIN89002 32.6 35.4 2.8 4.80
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD027 103 113 10 3.30
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD028 40.1 46.7 6.6 1.87
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD029 76.95 85.6 8.65 1.17
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD030 75.5 80.1 4.6 1.35
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD031 58.7 59.05 0.35 0.08
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD031 66.55 72.7 6.15 5.19
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD032 33.9 36.8 2.9 3.08
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD033 37.6 40.7 3.1 4.05
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD034 59.45 64.65 5.2 3.59
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD035 26.9 29.25 2.35 3.95
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD036 38 44.1 6.1 4.99
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD036 61.75 63.1 1.35 2.66
Kringelgruvan KRIN89003 11 11.824 0.824 12.80
Kringelgruvan KRIN89003 22.8 30.1 7.3 3.46
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 94
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Interval
(m)
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRIN89004 35.9 44.9 9 2.51
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD015 17.9 27.4 9.5 1.06
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD015 36.1 45.15 9.05 5.19
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD017 76.3 80.3 4 2.96
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD018 120.1 120.4 0.3 6.22
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD019 101.8 108.9 7.1 4.98
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD020 71.4 73.25 1.85 6.91
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD021 48 49 1 0.26
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD021 53.25 66.6 13.35 2.87
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD022 99.8 101.8 2 4.36
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD022 104.5 113.25 8.75 3.25
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD024 50.5 64.25 13.75 2.21
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD025 15.4 16.4 1 6.80
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD025 22.4 34.85 12.45 1.90
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD037 69.35 89.2 19.85 3.04
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD038 19.482 33.9 14.418 2.41
Kringelgruvan KRIN89005 21.1 40.4 19.3 2.67
Kringelgruvan KRIN89006 33.2 34.1 0.9 5.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN89006 37.1 55.1 18 1.02
Kringelgruvan KRIN89008 11.5 13.5 2 6.60
Kringelgruvan KRIN89008 31.5 37.4 5.9 4.36
Kringelgruvan KRIN89010 35.4 38.1 2.7 4.41
Kringelgruvan KRIN89010 50 55.5 5.5 3.80
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 85.85 87.9 2.05 5.28
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 87.9 88.3 0.4 6.10
Kringelgruvan KRIN89023 100 103.5 3.5 4.26
Kringelgruvan KRIN88017 62.35 65 2.65 4.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88021 19 27.1 8.1 3.12
Kringelgruvan KRIN88024 13.1 20.9 7.8 2.38
Kringelgruvan KRIN88025 28 33.2 5.2 0.36
Kringelgruvan KRIN88026 26.5 27.5 1 0.50
Kringelgruvan KRIN88026 27.5 28.9 1.4 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88026 28.9 38.2 9.3 2.84
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD001 15.4 27.372 11.972 2.11
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD001 27.372 39.5 12.128 4.60
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD002 41.2 41.201 0.001 10.20
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD002 46.15 53.811 7.661 4.69
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 95
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Interval
(m)
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD002 53.811 56.396 2.585 1.89
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD002 56.396 72.8 16.404 5.03
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD006 87.7 88.7 1 3.40
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD006 92.7 114 21.3 6.05
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 73.1 86.4 13.3 5.85
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 86.4 88.8 2.4 0.11
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 88.8 90.5 1.7 1.44
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 93.5 95.5 2 5.26
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 59.75 60.75 1 6.44
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 74 77.5 3.5 3.58
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 77.5 78.9 1.4 0.05
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 78.9 81.75 2.85 3.42
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD009 57.8 58.4 0.6 3.97
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 42.4 49.4 7 4.97
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 49.4 53.5 4.1 0.06
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 53.5 63.4 9.9 3.67
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD011 31.65 32.45 0.8 0.55
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD011 37.45 47.5 10.05 5.85
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD012 42.7 47 4.3 5.40
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD014 91.5 95.4 3.9 5.20
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD014 95.4 103.5 8.1 1.83
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD015 95 97.85 2.85 4.08
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD015 103.85 106.8 2.95 2.31
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD016 155.6 156.6 1 5.73
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD016 163.1 174.2 11.1 2.09
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD039 75 76.6 1.6 4.10
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD039 84.85 94.1 9.25 5.16
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 75.948 75.95 0.002 3.95
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 75.95 81.6 5.65 3.19
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD041 72.2 73.7 1.5 5.43
Kringelgruvan KRIN88007 77.7 79.1 1.4 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88007 79.1 91.4 12.3 3.46
Kringelgruvan KRIN88007 91.4 92.2 0.8 4.20
Kringelgruvan KRIN88007 92.2 93 0.8 4.20
Kringelgruvan KRIN88010 15.95 27.8 11.85 4.72
Kringelgruvan KRIN88011 24.45 24.58 0.13 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88011 24.58 25.55 0.97 0.00
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 96
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Interval
(m)
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRIN88011 25.55 27.2 1.65 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88011 27.2 45 17.8 5.58
Kringelgruvan KRIN88014 19.75 41.15 21.4 3.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 6.05 6.425 0.375 11.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88015 15.35 24.6 9.25 3.34
Kringelgruvan KRIN88016 42.4 50.3 7.9 5.06
Kringelgruvan KRIN88018 9.65 24.4 14.75 2.98
Kringelgruvan KRIN88019 49.7 51 1.3 2.59
Kringelgruvan KRIN88019 51 53 2 4.31
Kringelgruvan KRIN88019 53 57.8 4.8 0.76
Kringelgruvan KRIN88019 57.8 65.3 7.5 1.39
Kringelgruvan KRIN88020 39.1 40.4 1.3 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88020 40.4 53.5 13.1 4.07
Kringelgruvan KRIN88021 64.9 73.4 8.5 2.57
Kringelgruvan KRIN88022 84 89.8 5.8 2.89
Kringelgruvan KRIN88023 29.1 41.8 12.7 4.89
Kringelgruvan KRIN88024 63.2 66.2 3 2.60
Kringelgruvan KRIN88024 66.2 66.5 0.3 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88024 66.5 68.55 2.05 3.60
Kringelgruvan KRIN88026 75.5 87.9 12.4 1.95
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 34.4 48.1 13.7 5.16
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 112 119.65 7.65 2.93
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 104.35 117.6 13.25 3.44
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD010 80.6 84.1 3.5 2.74
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD013 120 133.05 13.05 3.82
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 90.1 100.15 10.05 3.72
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD041 75 92.5 17.5 3.34
Kringelgruvan KRIN88010 33.35 39.85 6.5 4.64
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 54.15 57.6 3.45 4.57
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD003 33.62 50 16.38 0.63
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD004 45.706 55.65 9.944 3.54
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD005 43.07 43.7 0.63 0.02
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD005 43.7 49 5.3 0.02
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD006 31.6 35.8 4.2 1.23
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 8.012 8.899 0.888 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 8.899 9.341 0.442 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD008 8.95 16.15 7.2 3.02
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 97
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Interval
(m)
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD013 14.5 18.3 3.8 2.01
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD039 6 13.6 7.6 4.26
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD039 13.6 28.9 15.3 2.89
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 9.8 14.35 4.55 11.57
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 14.35 14.352 0.002 0.08
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 14.352 14.362 0.01 0.08
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 21.613 21.65 0.037 0.56
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD041 18.35 23.35 5 4.07
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD041 34 34.688 0.688 2.73
Kringelgruvan KRIN88001 6.2 12 5.8 4.20
Kringelgruvan KRIN88002 17.1 27.343 10.243 1.86
Kringelgruvan KRIN88002 32.15 36.15 4 5.55
Kringelgruvan KRIN88003 3.25 16.2 12.95 0.09
Kringelgruvan KRIN88003 17.2 19.2 2 6.90
Kringelgruvan KRIN88004 5.45 9.087 3.637 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88005 11.65 15.65 4 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88006 3.332 3.474 0.142 12.60
Kringelgruvan KRIN88006 5.233 5.698 0.465 15.50
Kringelgruvan KRIN88007 9.038 9.082 0.044 10.20
Kringelgruvan KRIN88017 12.1 14.8 2.7 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88017 21.95 23.2 1.25 3.39
Kringelgruvan KRIN88019 5.112 5.114 0.002 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88028 33.5 35.588 2.088 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRIN88028 35.588 37.3 1.712 2.13
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 6.4 10.683 4.283 2.99
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 10.683 27.15 16.467 2.42
Kringelgruvan KRIN89015 27.15 28.35 1.2 5.85
Kringelgruvan KRIN89016 11.7 32.65 20.95 2.34
Kringelgruvan KRIN89018 34.25 36.25 2 2.50
Kringelgruvan KRIN89021 7.8 8.794 0.994 1.24
Kringelgruvan KRIN89022 2.6 17.2 14.6 2.60
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD004 73.6 76.3 2.7 1.50
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD006 55.55 63.9 8.35 1.28
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD007 27.5 30 2.5 2.20
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD004 6.2 11.5 5.3 4.92
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD005 17.75 23.75 6 1.29
Kringelgruvan KRIN89017 17 22.75 5.75 4.05
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 98
Project Hole
Number
From
(m)
To
(m)
Interval
(m)
Cg
(%)
Kringelgruvan KRIN88025 37.5 40 2.5 0.68
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD019 71 72 1 6.74
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD020 47.5 49.5 2 4.37
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD020 58.5 61.1 2.6 4.11
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD013 61.1 62.1 1 4.71
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD040 23.65 28.5 4.85 2.55
Kringelgruvan KRIN89014 9.35 13.3 3.95 0.00
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD014 19.25 21.6 2.35 1.52
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD014 21.6 21.9 0.3 1.10
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD015 46.35 47.65 1.3 3.13
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD018 127.4 128.9 1.5 9.04
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD005 31.501 41.9 10.399 0.85
Kringelgruvan KRI12DD006 18.3 19.3 1 3.83
Kringelgruvan KRIN89019 31.35 37.3 5.95 2.67
SECTION 15 MINERAL RESERVE ESTIMATES
There are no NI 43-101 mineral reserve estimates available to, or commissioned by, Woxna.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 99
SECTION 16 MINING METHODS
16.1 INTRODUCTION
16.1.1 PREAMBLE
Woxna Graphite AB (Woxna) requested that Golder Associates AB (Golder) undertake pit
optimisation, design and scheduling as part of the Kringelgruvan Preliminary Economic Analysis
(PEA) study of the Woxna Project situated in Central Sweden.
Pit optimisation, design and sequencing were conducted using industry standard mining software.
The optimised open pit was established first using financial parameters. The selected shell generated
from the optimisation results formed the basis for the subsequent final pit design and mine production
schedule. The mine schedule was the key driver to estimate the contractor equipment fleet and
workforce required to manage and operate the mine. The Kringelgruvan geological model and
financial parameters have been supplied by Woxna and GBM to Golder.
16.1.2 TECHNICAL ACTIVITIES
The following technical tasks have been completed as part of this mining study:
1) Import Vulcan geological model provided into Datamine software and set up required
parameters for pit optimisation;
2) Export model outputs to Whittle software;
3) Set up Whittle Model (value, pit revenue factor ranges, processing and selling costs,
processing and mining rates) complete open pit shell optimisation;
4) Perform basic sensitivity analysis of revenue, graphite price and slope angle;
5) Prepare and present a preliminary PowerPoint presentation of results for review and
discussion;
6) Provide pit limits for subsequent geology and mine planning tasks, i.e. grade control, pit
design, waste dump design and mine scheduling;
7) Perform preliminary drill and blast design for production drilling;
8) Select equipment fleet size and determine manpower plan;
9) Provide an overall site layout drawing;
10) Present mining contractor operating expenses (OPEX) based on contractors’ estimates for
stripping, drilling, blasting and mining activities; and
16.1.3 SUPPLIED INPUT INFORMATION
Woxna and GBM supplied the following items used as a basis of design for the mining study:
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 100
Vulcan geological block model including current topography and geological boundaries;
Mineral types and grades;
Cut-off grade;
Royalties;
Modifying factors (processing recoveries);
Direct and indirect processing costs;
Graphite sale price; and
Discount rate.
Golder determined the following inputs for the mining study:
Modifying factors (mining losses and mining dilution);
Direct and indirect mining cost based on mining contractors quotes; and
Pit design parameters.
A table of the provided input parameters for the Kringelgruvan deposit that formed the basis of the
optimisation and open-pit design are included in below and summarized in the following sections.
Table 16-1: Pit Optimisation Parameters
Kringelgruvan deposit Unit Value
Graphite price USD/t 1 500
Discount factor % 10
Exchange rate SEK:USD 6.57:1
Mining royalties % 0.2
Processing plant recovery rate % 85
Waste mining cost USD/t 4.50
Graphite mining cost USD/t 7.20
Plant and infrastructure operating expenses (inclusive of general, administration and selling costs)
USD/t 70.20
Mining dilution % 2.5
Mining losses % 2.5
Inter-ramp slope angle (ramp not included) ° 55
The final processing costs, throughput and sale prices are different to those shown above, however
Golder has verified the new values do not materially change the mine design at PEA level.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 101
16.2 GEOLOGY AND MINERAL RESOURCES
The Mineral Resources for the Kringelgruvan graphite deposit were reported in “Mineral Resource
Estimates for Kringelgruvan Woxna Deposit” Memorandum authored by Geoffrey Charles Reed from
Reed Leyton Consulting and dated April 2013.
The mineral resource estimate at a cut-off grade of 7.0 % graphite presented in the aforementioned
memorandum is summarised below.
Table 16-2: Kringelgruvan Deposit 2013 Mineral Resource Estimate
Classification Tonnes
(Mt) C
(%)
Measured 1.0 10.7
Indicated 1.8 10.7
Total 2.8 10.7
The Kringelgruvan mineral resource is reported only in the Measured and Indicated categories. The
Inferred classification category has not been reported in this mining study.
The “Technical Report for Kringelgruvan Graphite Deposit, Part of the Woxna Graphite Project,
Central Sweden, and prepared for Flinders Resources Limited,” (2012 Technical Report) authored by
Geoffrey Charles Reed from Reed Leyton Consulting and dated November 2, 2012 indicated that:
Kringelgruvan has variable cover of 2 m to 15 m of Quaternary age moraine;
Graphite is found as both flakes (>70 µm) and a finer-grained amorphous, microcrystalline
type;
Graphite has a dark streak and is visually obvious in core;
Mineral resources are classified as Indicated and Measured based on the density of drilling,
checked composited grades, inter-holes continuity;
A cut-off grade of 7 % Carbon graphite (Cg) was used as the base case to calculate the
resource; and
Grade interpolation was undertaken using inverse distance within defined mineralisation
domain wireframes.
The property has a thin overburden layer and near surface mineral resource. Consequently the
conventional open pit mining method previously used at Kringelgruvan continues to be the most
suitable and economic method to restart mining.
The Kringelgruvan open pit mining method, which includes drilling, blasting, loading, and hauling, is
designed for multiple open pit phases throughout the LOM. Drilling and blasting will be required on all
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 102
of the mineral resource and waste rock. Drilling is planned to be performed using conventional down-
the-hole hammer rigs capable of single pass drilling. Blasting will use commercial bulk explosive
(emulsion) with down-hole delay initiation. A hydraulic shovel will load 40 tonne off-highway haul
trucks.
16.3 GEOLOGICAL BLOCK MODEL
16.3.1 INTRODUCTION
Golder has undertaken open pit optimisation using the mineral resource block model prepared by
Reed Leyton Consulting.
Whittle 4x was used to develop optimal pit geometries using the Lerchs - Grossmann (LG) algorithm
with the mineral resource block model using preliminary parameters and assumptions. The optimised
open pit(s) geometries delimit a potentially mineable mineral resource and are used to generate a
mine design and LOM production plan.
Woxna supplied the following geological block in two different file formats as follow:
vie_voxna_2013apr_75.bmf (Vulcan file format); and
vie_voxna_2013apr_75.csv (CSV file format).
16.3.2 KRINGELGRUVAN BLOCK MODEL
16.3.2.1 GEOLOGICAL BLOCK MODEL VALIDATION
Validated geological models were provided by Woxna, and the information has been assumed to be
accurate by Golder. Golder has not updated or validated this previous work. Golder conducted an
interrogation of the geological block model “vie_voxna_2013apr_75.bmf” solely to understand the
mineralization domains and the variables used to determine the mineral resource estimate. Golder
did not audit Kringelgruvan mineral resource estimate.
Golder was supplied with a 3D block model in Maptek Vulcan™ format for the Kringelgruvan deposit.
The geological model provided and employed in this report is in the SWEREF99 survey reference
system. The geological model provided did not contain air blocks which had been removed.
Manipulation of the geological model was required to prepare the model for input into Whittle software
used for pit optimisation. Golder utilized Datamine™ software for the preparation and export to a
Whittle block model format. The model manipulation steps included:
Import of the supplied geology block model in comma-separated values (CSV) file format into
Datamine and comparison of tonnes and grade to verify conversion;
Creation and population of additional model variables used in the optimisation process; and
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 103
Export to Whittle 4 x format (.mod file) and cross check of model tonnes and total graphite
units in Whittle.
Woxna supplied the following densities presented in Table 16-3 to use for waste, graphite and
overburden material.
Table 16-3: Density by Material Type in Geological Block Model “vie_voxna_2013apr_75.csv”
Model Lithtype Attribute Density
t/m3 Material
Bmtu 2.7 Banded meta-stuff
Grf (B type graphite) 2.7 Graphite mineralisation
Hg (A type graphite) 2.7 Higher grade graphite mineralisation
Msed 2.7 Meta-sediment
Ovb 1.8 Overburden
Peg 2.7 Pegmatite
The following sections summarise modelling steps and checks applied to the Kringelgruvan deposit.
16.3.2.2 BLOCK MODEL PARAMETERS
The block model parameters are shown in Table 16-4. The block model is in SWEREF99 survey
coordinate reference system.
Table 16-4: Kringelgruvan Geological Block Model Parameters
X Coordinate
(Easting)
Y Coordinate
(Northing)
Z Coordinate
(RL)
Model origin 531 800 6 808 250 0
Block size (m) 5 25 5
Sub Block size (m) (minimum) 1.25 6.25 1.25
Rotation 90 (Bearing) 0 (Plunge) 0
16.3.2.3 BLOCK MODEL VARIABLES
The key variables required to describe the geology (PEM type) and grade are show in Table 16-5.
The Kringelgruvan geological model does not contain air blocks. The model contains in-situ blocks
(not mined) and mined out blocks.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 104
Table 16-5: Geological Block Model Key Variables
Variable Name Description
Lithtype Banded meta-stuff, graphite mineralization, high grade graphite mineralization, meta-sediment, overburden or pegmatite
C_uncut Carbon
Bd Bulk density
Category Resource category (inf, ind or meas)
Rsc_cat 0 non classified, 1 measured , 2 indicated, 3 inferred, 4 additional mineralisation
Mined In-situ or mined
Volume Block volume
Graphite tonnes Tonnes
16.3.2.4 IN-SITU RESOURCES
The in-situ mineral resource tonnage and grade from the supplied Kringelgruvan Block Model CSV file
are presented in Table 16-6, Table 16-7 and Table 16-8. The Whittle open pit optimisation is based
exclusively on the in-situ Measured and Indicated mineral resources in this resource block model and
excluded blocks mined previously. Note that the confidence in Inferred mineral resources is
insufficient to allow for the meaningful application of technical and economic parameters or to enable
an evaluation of economic viability worthy of public disclosure. The cut-off grade used in the Whittle
optimisation was 7 % graphite.
Table 16-6: Kringelgruvan Geological Model In-situ Tonnes and Grade
Resource category
Tonnage
Mt
Average Graphite
%
Total Graphite
Mt
Waste 568.564 0 0
Measured 1.936 7.2 0.140
Indicated 3.99 6.8 0.270
Inferred 0.954 5.7 0.54
Additional mineralization 1.949 3.3 0.64
Table 16-7: Kringelgruvan Geological Model In-situ Tonnes and Grade Using a 7 % cut-off Grade
Resource category Tonnage
Mt
Average Graphite
%
Total Graphite
Mt
Measured 0.934 10.7 0.099
Indicated 1.784 10.7 0.190
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 105
Resource category Tonnage
Mt
Average Graphite
%
Total Graphite
Mt
Inferred 0.379 11.0 0.042
Total Measured and Indicated 2.718 10.7 0.289
Table 16-8: Kringelgruvan Geological Model In-situ Tonnes and Grade Per Mineral Type
Mineral Type Tonnage
Mt
Average Graphite
%
Total Graphite
Mt
Higher grade graphite mineralization (A type) 3.411 10.2 0.346
Graphite mineralization (B type) 5.382 3.4 0.182
Total 8.793 6.0 0.528
16.3.2.5 EXPORT TO DATAMINE BLOCK MODEL
The geological model CSV file format was imported in Datamine software.
As a check the Datamine model tonnes and grades were compared to the original CSV file format.
There is a very minor difference due to re-blocking of the model after the regularization process. The
Vulcan block model reported tonnes and percentage of graphite were presented in Table 16-6.
16.3.2.6 TOPOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGICAL BOUNDARIES
The topographic surface and geological boundaries supplied are included in Table 16-9.
Table 16-9: Topography and Geological Boundaries
File Description
zone1_2m_rt90_25gv_clipped_solid.00t Topography solid
open_pit_aug_solid.00t Existing Kringelgruvan open pit solid
ovb_mar13.00t Overburden
mxatall.00t Higher grade graphite mineralization (A type)
mxbtall.00t Graphite mineralization (B type)
mx_msed.00t Meta-sediment
mx_peg.00t Pegmatite
mx_peg1.00t Pegmatite1
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 106
16.3.2.7 VERIFICATION OF DATAMINE BLOCK MODEL
As a check the Datamine model tonnes and grades were compared to the original CSV file format.
There is a very minor difference due to re-blocking of the model after the regularization process. The
Datamine block model reported tonnes and percentage of graphite are presented in Table 16-10.
Table 16-10: Kringelgruvan Datamine Geological Model Tonnes and Grade (no cut-off applied)
Resource Category Volume
(Mm3)
Tonnes
(Mt)
Density
(t/m3)
Graphite
Grade
(%)
Total Tonnes Graphite
(t)
Waste 214.1 568.6 2.66 0.00 -
Measured 0.717 1.94 2.70 7.23 139,946
Indicated 1.48 3.99 2.70 6.78 270,640
Inferred 0.353 0.954 2.70 5.68 54,248
Additional Material 0.722 1.95 2.70 3.27 63,660
Total/Average 217.4 577.4 2.67 0.09 528,494
The Datamine block model reconciled to within 0.46 % of the Vulcan block model tonnes and volume.
16.4 WHITTLE OPTIMISATION
16.4.1 INPUT BLOCK MODEL
The Whittle Four-X optimisation for the Kringelgruvan deposit is based on Measured and Indicated
mineral resources only with no cut-off applied.
The Datamine model vie_voxna_2013apr_75.dm was imported into Whittle and reblocked to (10 m x
12.5 m x 10 m) and (10 m x 25 m x 10 m). Re-blocking in Whittle is used to complete the pit
optimisation with a practical selective mining unit (SMU), which is manifested in the block size used in
the optimisation.
Variables defining the waste, mineral resources tonnes for each block were added to the block model.
In order to run the scenario in Whittle it was necessary to add a new calculated variable into the
model for the total tonnage of the block.
TOTN: Total tonnage of the block = density x volume of the block.
All blocks in the supplied Vulcan block model had a 2.7 t/m3 value as bulk density. The bulk density
value of the blocks coded as “ovb” was therefore changed to 1.8 t/m3 to more accurately represent the
overburden tonnage.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 107
16.4.2 DATAMINE CONVERSION AND DATA
The surface and geological boundaries were used as received, as per the supplied Vulcan model.
16.4.2.1 VERIFICATION OF MODEL ESTIMATES
A manual check was made comparing block values to the CSV block model. Slices were made
through the block model and tonnes and grade were interrogated for several blocks. The final
optimisation block model, vie_voxna_2013apr_75.dm, tonnes reported by material type is included in
Table 16-11.
Table 16-11: Optimisation Block Model Tonnes
Rsc_cat MTonnes
Waste 568.560
Measured 1.936
Indicated 3.990
Inferred 0.954
Additional Mineralisation 1.950
The total Measured and Indicated mineral resources tonnage at no cut-off grade in the model is
5.926 M tonnes.
16.4.3 EXPORT TO WHITTLE
The optimisation block model (vie_voxna_2013apr_75_x_final.dm) was exported from Datamine to a
Whittle block file (vie_voxna_2013apr_75_x_rev1.mod) and imported into Whittle software. A check
of the model quantities is shown in the screenshot in Figure 16-1.
Due to the small and irregular block sizes used to define the geological boundaries, the model was re-
blocked to 10 m x 25 m x 10 m in Whittle to reduce the processing run time. Total tonnes and units
were checked and matched those in Figure 16-1 below.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 108
Figure 16-1: Screenshot of Imported Whittle Block Models Summary for Kringelgruvan
16.4.4 WHITTLE OPTIMISATION PARAMETERS
16.4.4.1 GEOTECHNICAL OVERALL SLOPE ANGLE
An overall slope angle of 55 ° was applied based on the existing Kringelgruvan open pit for a high wall
design incorporating 5 m high benches, 2.5 m wide berms and a 65 ° face angle for all material types.
These angles were applied on both the hanging wall and footwall of the resource for the optimisation.
Ramps were not separately accounted for in the Whittle open pit economics determination and
optimisation.
A sensitivity to design wall slope angles was performed as part of a basic sensitivity analysis in
Whittle. The following two different slope angles cases were run in Whittle:
55 ° overall slope angle; and
65 ° inter-ramp slope angle for first two bench and 55 ° inter-ramp slope angle for the
remaining bench.
The Whittle results indicate that pit is relatively insensitive to slope angle.
The pit slope design is discussed in Section 16.5 below.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 109
16.4.4.2 MINE AND PLANT PRODUCTION SCHEDULE
For the purposes of optimisation, the annual mine production capacity was limited to 100 000 t ROM
for Kringelgruvan.
Subsequent process design has increased production requirements to 155 000 t/a. Golder reviewed
the impact of this and other changed optimisation parameters and determined that mine planning
would not be significantly affected by this change and the mine design was therefore not re-iterated.
16.4.4.3 DILUTION AND MINING RECOVERY
Based on Golder’s experience, the mining modifying factors were applied in Whittle for graphite
dilution and losses. An overall dilution factor of 2.5 % in volume was assumed. The graphite grade of
the diluting material surrounding the mineralised domains was assumed to be zero. The overall
mining recovery was estimated at approximately 97.5 % based on a 2.5 % mining losses assumption.
Golder is assuming the high mining recovery will only be achievable if selective mining practices
combined with sampling and grade control are followed.
16.4.4.4 COSTS
Cost assumptions were supplied by Woxna, GBM and Golder. In Whittle optimisation any
expenditure that would stop if mining stopped must be included in the cost of mining, processing or
selling graphite.
The costs for this study were developed considering; direct mining costs, processing costs, selling
costs, and overhead or time dependent costs.
16.4.4.4.1 DIRECT MINING COSTS
Direct mining costs relate to the cost per unit of production such as load and haul, and blasting. A
combined mining cost per tonne was provided by SMI and listed in Table 16-12 for each material type
mined.
Table 16-12: Direct Mining Costs Assumptions
Material type SEK /t USD /t
Overburden 35 4.50
Waste 35 4.50
Graphite 48 7.20
Vertical Mining Cost Component N/A N/A
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 110
16.4.4.4.2 PROCESSING COSTS AND RECOVERY
The following assumed values for graphite plant recovery and operating cost at the processing plant
were provided by GBM:
Processing plant graphite recovery 85 %; and
Plant and infrastructure operating expenses (inclusive of general & administration, and selling
costs) 70.2 USD/ROM tonne.
16.4.4.4.3 INDIRECT OR TIME RELATED COSTS
Extra costs which result from extending the life of the mine were not accounted for. Time costs
include site overhead costs such as inductions, training, supervision, workshop, offices, technical
services, light vehicles, and other similar associated costs.
Woxna did not supply an annual indirect cost estimate therefore no cost was included in Whittle for
Kringelgruvan deposit.
16.4.4.4.4 SELLING COSTS
Selling costs are those costs that are incurred when the product is sold. In this particular case it
applies payment of royalties. A 0.2 % royalty was provided by GBM for use in the optimisation and
was converted to a selling cost per unit in Whittle.
16.4.4.5 SELLING PRICE
An average graphite sale price of 1 500 USD/t was provided by GBM based on the mineralogy,
expected graphite recoveries and current market prices.
16.4.4.6 DISCOUNT RATE
A 10 % discounting rate supplied by Flinders Resources was applied in Whittle to calculate the net
present value of the optimisations. Results are reported as discounted net value for the deposit
assessed.
16.4.5 WHITTLE .PAR FILE
A Whittle optimisation parameter file (.par) was developed to run the Whittle optimisation. The PAR
file defines the various whittle inputs developed and determines how the Whittle optimisation uses
them in the optimisation process.
The PAR file includes information regarding the number of optimisation iterations and how they are
calculated. The number of optimisations is controlled by the revenue factor (RF), which was
calculated over the range of 0.5 to 1.2 (at an increment of 0.01). The RF is used to determine pit limit
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 111
sensitivity to graphite price. The RF range approach is a simple way to scale values to produce a
range of optimal pit shells for different graphite prices. This is a powerful tool for mine planning as
commodity prices generally are subject to a high degree of uncertainty over time.
The revenue factor range is relative to the defined base graphite price, i.e. RF 1.0 = 1 500 USD/t.
For example RF 0.5 uses a graphite price of 750 USD/t and RF 1.2 is using a graphite price of
1 800 USD/t.
16.4.6 WHITTLE OPTIMISATION RESULTS
Whittle optimisation software generates a series of nested pit shells by varying the Revenue Factor
parameter based on a set of financial and other parameters such as costs and graphite price. This
section gives a summary of Kringelgruvan optimisation results.
A summary of the pertinent Whittle pit shells generated by revenue factor are presented in
Table 16-13 and illustrated in Figure 16-2. In the absence of a determination of feasibility, the term
Potentially Economic Material (PEM) is used to describe material that may in future be deemed to
have an economically viable grade of mineralisation. This material is also referred to as ROM.
Table 16-13: Kringelgruvan Whittle Pit by Pit Summary of Results
Pit Number Revenue
Factor
Discounted Net Cashflow
(USD M)
PEM Processed
(Mt includes dilution)
Waste
(Mt)
Cut-off C
(%)
8 0.85 21.8 1.3 4.9 7.0
11 1.00 19.6 1.9 10.8 7.0
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 112
Figure 16-2: Whittle Resultant Pits (RF 0.85 – Magenta, RF 1.0 – Blue)
The optimisation results are presented graphically in Figure 16-3 pit tonnage waste and mineral
versus revenue factor and discounted net value. Figure 16-4 for pit value and mineral tonnage versus
the revenue factor and discounted net value.
Figure 16-3: Graph of Kringelgruvan Graphite and Waste Tonnage Versus Revenue Factor and Discounted Net Value
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 113
Figure 16-4: Kringelgruvan Graph of Results Pit Discounted Net Value and Tonnes of Graphite by Revenue Factor
16.4.6.1 ANALYSIS OF RESULTS
The highest value pit generated is the RF 0.85 pit, Pit 8. Pit 8 generates 1.3 Mt mineral resource
including dilution and 4.9 Mt of waste with a discounted net value of USD 21.8 M.
The RF 1.0 results in Pit 11 which generated 1.9 Mt of mineral resource including dilution and 10.8 Mt
of waste with a discounted net value of USD 19.6 M.
16.4.6.2 SENSITIVITY
The sensitivity of the discounted net value generated for the Pit 11 shell to slope angle, cut-off grade,
processing recovery rate and the graphite price are shown in Figure 16-5.
The graph shows that Kringelgruvan pit value is relatively insensitive to slope angle and cut-off grade.
The pits were relatively sensitive to the graphite selling price and process recovery rate. A 10 %
decrease in the graphite price results in a change in graphite inventory of approximately 40 Kt.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 114
Figure 16-5: Kringelgruvan Spider Graph Sensitivity of Pit Value to Variance of Costs and Graphite Price
16.4.7 WHITTLE PIT SELECTION
The highest value pit shell may not necessarily be the shell chosen for the pit design as a number of
other criteria are generally considered when choosing pit shells as a basis for stages and the final pit
designs.
The RF 1.0 pit detailed in Table 16-14 was selected by Golder for the purposes of the PEA study and
forms the basis of the smooth pit designs and the Kringelgruvan production schedules.
Table 16-14: Selected Pit Shell and Whittle Results for Kringelgruvan Deposit
Pit Number Revenue
Factor Discounted Net Cashflow
(USD M) PEM Processed
(Mt includes dilution) Waste (Mt)
Cut-off C(%)
11 1.00 19.6 1.9 10.8 7.0
The RF 1.0 Kringelgruvan Whittle pit contours are illustrated in Figure 16-6. The RF 1.0 optimisation
resulted in the generation of two distinct pits, the East Pit and the West Pit.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 115
Figure 16-6: Kringelgruvan RF 1.0 Whittle Pits
The smooth pit design employed the Whittle outlines as guidance for the bench outlines and ramp
locations. The open pit design is described in Section 16.6.1 below. The geotechnical criterion used
in the mine design is detailed in Section 16.5 below.
16.5 PIT SLOPE DESIGN CONCEPT
16.5.1 GENERAL
A key objective for hard rock open pit mine slope design is to determine the most stable maximum pit
slope angles that provide an acceptable level of safety whilst minimising waste stripping and
maximising financial return. It is good practice to continuously monitor pit wall stability as the pit
development progresses and to implement preventive or remediation measures to detect and manage
slope instability through design and operating standards and procedures.
This section gives an overview of the terms typically used in the design of pit slope geometries as well
as key geotechnical and mining pit slope design factors.
16.5.2 PIT SLOPE CONFIGURATIONS
Figure 16-7 illustrates the pit slope terminology that is used throughout this report to describe
benches and haul road ramps and the geometric arrangement of the pit walls.
West Pit
East Pit
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 116
Figure 16-7: Inter-relationships Between Bench Geometry, Inter-ramp Slope Angle, and the Overall Slope Angle (Wyllie & Mah, 2004)
The geometry illustrated in Figure 16-7 of the open pit wall is influenced by slope angle, inter-ramp
angle, and the bench geometry. Note that the bench face angles are defined between the toe and
crest of each bench, whereas the inter-ramp slope angles between the haul roads/ramps are defined
by the line of the bench toes. The overall slope angle is always measured from the toe of the slope to
the topmost, or daylight, crest.
16.5.2.1 BENCH GEOMETRY
The bench height is determined by the reach of the excavator chosen for the mining operation and to
minimise mining dilution and maximise recovery. The bench face angle is usually determined to
reduce, to an acceptable level, the amount of material that will likely fall from the face or crest and
remain stable over the required life of the project. The bench width is sized to prevent small wedges
and blocks from the bench faces falling down the slope and posing a hazard to men and equipment.
Figure 16-8 illustrates the bench geometry that results from the bench face angle and bench width
which will ultimately dictate the inter-ramp slope angle. In order to steepen the inter-ramp slopes, and
minimise the excavation of waste rock, the pit slopes at Kringelgruvan will incorporate double
benches of 10 m in height.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 117
Figure 16-8: Catch Bench Geometry (originally from Call, 1986) (Kuchta & Hustrulid, 2006)
16.5.2.2 INTER-RAMP SLOPE
The maximum inter-ramp slope angle is dictated by the bench geometry. However, it is also
necessary to evaluate the potential for multiple bench scale instabilities due to large-scale structural
features such as faults, shear zones, bedding planes, foliation etc. In some cases, these persistent
features may completely control the achievable inter-ramp angles and the slope may have to be
flattened to account for their presence.
Other factors that may reduce the overall slope angles are things such as rock mass strength,
groundwater pressures, blasting vibration, drill and blast precision, stress conditions and mine
equipment requirements.
16.5.3 PIT SLOPE DESIGN FACTORS
Golder has not performed any stability analysis on the open pit design. A geotechnical analysis
should be conducted to determine safe design parameters for the ultimate open pit slopes wall
geometries. Development of slope design criteria involves analysis of predicted failure modes that
could affect the slope at bench, inter ramp and overall scales. The level of stability can then be
assessed against the acceptance criteria, which is usually specified by the owner-operator and/or
regulator in terms of safety and economic risk.
It should be recognised that in stronger rocks failure is likely to be structurally controlled and that in
weaker rocks the rockmass strength is a controlling factor down to the bench scale.
The process of slope design conventionally starts with the development of a geotechnical model for
the proposed pit which is subdivided into geotechnical domains. The domains are rock types with
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 118
similar characteristics in terms of geology, structure and material properties. For each domain the
potential failure modes can be assessed and designs at the bench, inter-ramp and overall scale are
based on the acceptance criterion be it ‘Factor of safety’ or ‘Probability of failure’.
16.5.3.1 SITE HYDROGEOLOGICAL CONDITIONS
High groundwater pressures and water pressure in tension cracks will reduce rock mass shear
strength and can adversely impact slope stability. Depressurization programs can reduce water
pressure behind the pit walls and allow steeper pit slopes to be developed in the ultimate pit slope
walls.
To the south east of the proposed mine site is the Östermyrorna, which is classified as national
interest nature conservation area (kommun, 2012) and slightly encroaches on the Kringelgruvan
mining area. The Östermyrorna area is ecologically sensitive and described as follows: “multiform
wetland area with the value of wetland complexes, swamp forest, slightly domed bog, made at
waterways, soli genic and top geological marshes. Much of the area is limestone and has a rich
flora.” (Blonde, 1998). Figure 16-9 shows an overview map of the Ovanåkers kommun is presented
which illustrates the relative location between Kringelgruvan area (R22) and Östermyrorna area (R2).
The presence of free water contiguous to the open pits presents some operating risk to the pit wall
stability. The site hydrogeologic conditions need to be investigated in greater detail and used as an
input into the pit design.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 119
Figure 16-9: Ovanakers Kommun Overview Map
16.5.3.2 STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY
The orientation and cohesive strength of major, continuous geological features such as faults, shear
planes, weak bedding planes, structural fabric, and/or persistent planar joints will strongly influence
the overall stability of the pit walls.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 120
Drill core and geotechnical logging will help in assessing and determining rock fractures and intact
mechanical rock properties. Additional data relating to the geometrical properties of the
discontinuities should also be collected as part of a geological site investigation.
16.5.3.3 ROCK MASS STRUCTURE
The ultimate inter-ramp slope angle is a function of individual benches geometries stability as well as
the orientation, strength, and persistence of smaller scale structural features such as joints. Rock
mass structure is also controlled by:
Intact properties of both mineral resources and waste material (modulus and uniaxial
compressive strength); and
Mine geometrical properties (ramp specification, bench and berm).
16.5.3.4 LITHOLOGY AND ALTERATION
Graphite lithology has been logged and geological grade domains have been modelled in Vulcan to
best represent the margin of the graphite mineralised bodies during mineral resource estimation.
Grouping rock masses within different geological domains according to geotechnical characteristics
and level of alteration of their rock types is a key tool in the evaluation of the stability of the ultimate pit
walls.
16.5.3.5 ROCK MASS STRENGTH
Rock mass strengths are typically estimated using intact rock strength and rock mass classification
schemes such as the Rock Mass Rating (RMR) system. Shallower overall slope angles may have to
be considered if the graphite or waste materials are of a lower rock mass quality.
16.5.3.6 BLASTING PRACTICES
Production blasting around the walls can considerably affect interim and final pit walls. The blast-
induced disturbance damages rock walls and reduces the effective strength of the rock mass.
Controlled blasting programs near the final wall can be implemented to reduce blasting induced
disturbances and allow steeper slopes. Good safety practice at the mine site should include scaling
of blast induced fracturing to minimise rockfalls and local failures.
16.5.3.7 ROCKMASS PROPERTIES
The host rock is in metasediments (Reed, 2012). Laboratory tests of pegmatite granite at Forsmark
(Jacobsson, 2007) in Sweden show a uniaxial compressive strength of 167 MPa. The estimated
uniaxial compressive strength is estimated to be between 100 MPa and 200 MPa. In order to
determine more accurate value for uniaxial compressive strength, tests on rock samples are required.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 121
The pegmatite granite has a density of 2.62 kg/m3, Young modulus of 70 GPa and poisson ratio of
0.29 (compressive).
16.5.3.8 ROCK STRESS CONDITIONS
Mining induces stress changes due to lateral unloading around the walls of the open pit. Stress
release can negatively affect the quality of the rock mass and increases in slope displacements.
Localised stress decrease can reduce confinement and result in an increased incidence of ravelling
type failures in the walls. Modifying the mining arrangement and sequence can sometimes manage
these stress changes to enhance the integrity of the final pit walls.
No stress measurements have been performed at the Kringelgruvan mine site. The World Stress
Map (WSM) has an online predefined stress field map of the Earth’s crust based on the WSM
database 2008 available for the Nordic region (Heidbach, Tingay, Barth, & Reinecker, 2008). The
WSM displays the orientations of the maximum horizontal compressive stress SH. The length of the
stress symbols represents the data quality, with A being the best quality. Quality A data are assumed
to record the orientation of SH to within 10 ° to 15 °, quality B data to within 15 ° to 20 °, and quality C
data to within 25 °. Quality D data are considered to give questionable tectonic stress orientations
(Zoback, 1992; Sperner et al., 2003; Heidbach et al., 2007).
The WSM database has some stress field measurement nearby the Kringelgruvan mine site, which
shows the maximum horizontal stress has a direction of 352 ° in Azimuth and 38 ° for plunge, the
medium stress has an azimuth of 156 ° and 51 ° for plunge. Besides the WSM, there are some
equations show the variation of horizontal stresses for Fennoscandia (Stephansson, 1993) for
example the following equations:
10.8 0.037
5.1 0.029
0.8 0.02
In which , and are major, intermediate and minor stresses in MPa, and represents the depth
in meters. An overall slope angle of 55 degrees was therefore preliminarily assumed based on the
foregoing data.
16.6 OPEN PIT MINING
16.6.1 OPEN PIT MINE DESIGN
The ultimate open pit mine design layout for Kringelgruvan was generated based on the Whittle
optimisation RF 1.0 pit shell, the geotechnical parameters discussed in Section 16.5 above and the
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 122
operating ranges of the proposed mining mobile plant. The key inputs to the open pit mine design are
summarised in Table 16-15.
Table 16-15: Open Pit Design Parameters
Parameter Units Value
Bench Height m 10
Batter Angle Degrees 78 °
Berm Width m 3.0
Design Slope Angle Degrees 55 ° – 65 °
Ramp Width m 10
Ramp Gradient 1:10 (10 %)
Final Slope Angle Degrees Variable
Minimum Mining Width m 15 - 20
The final pit designs were completed using the parameters listed in Table 16-15. The pits are
accessed by ramps that connect to the current haulage routes to the waste tip areas and the
processing plant. The two pits are illustrated in Figure 16-10.
Figure 16-10: Final Kringelgruvan Pit Designs
West Pit
East Pit
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 123
The 10 m wide haulage ramps were designed in the geological hanging-wall of the deposit because
the previous operators on the site had experienced problems maintaining the ramp in the footwall of
the mineralisation. The haul ramps were decreased to 6 m wide to access lower benches. All of the
ramps were designed to be within the Whittle RF 1.0 shell to minimise the amount of additional waste
stripping and associated mining costs. Whilst not included in the mining schedule, some PEM in the
ramp can be recovered by retreat mining up the ramp.
The final pit designs were quite close to the outlines of the selected Whittle shells. The two designs
as shown in Figure 16-10 are illustrated with the RF 1.0 shells in Figure 16-11 below. A bench by
bench comparison is shown in Figure 16-12.
Figure 16-11: Final Pit Designs Compared with the RF 1.0 Whittle Shells
West Pit
East Pit
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 124
Figure 16-12: Comparison of the Final Pit Design with the RF1.0 Whittle Shell (207.5 m Elevation) in Plan
Typical sections through the East and West pits comparing the final design to the RF 1.0 shells are in
Figure 16-13. Due to the method used to generate the slopes in Whittle, the final pit designs are
steeper than the Whittle shells. In the Whittle runs the slopes were set at 55 ° for the first two
benches and then at 65 ° to the pit bottoms.
532950 East (East Pit)
West Pit
East Pit
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 125
532300 E (West Pit)
Figure 16-13: Comparison of the Final Pit Design on Section (as labelled)
The total mined resource included in the pit designs is tabulated by pit in Table 16-16.
Table 16-16: Summary of Total In-pit Resources
Source PEM
kTonnes Grade Graphite
Waste kTonnes
Total kTonnes
Waste: PEM Ratio
East Pit 889 706 10.54 3 757 246 4 646 952 4.2
West Pit 1 009 033 11.4 5 841 597 6 850 631 5.8
Total Inventory 1 898 739 10.98 9 598 843 11 497 583 5.1
The pit design tonnages and grades compare favourably with the RF 1.0 Whittle shell results,
recovering 85.4 % of the PEM tonnes and just 81 % of the waste included in the Whittle shells.
The distributions of the mineable tonnage by bench in two pits are illustrated in Figure 16-14. The low
grade tonnages indicated in Figure 16-14 is material with a grade between 5 % and 7 % graphite.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 126
Figure 16-14: Distribution of Tonnage by Bench in the West (left) and East (right) Pit Designs
16.6.2 MINE PRODUCTION SCHEDULING
The mine production schedule was developed in a set of steps looking to determine an efficient start-
up of mining operations. A key objective of the schedule was to limit the amount of waste stripping in
the early phases of mine development to reduce the capital expense of re-starting the mine.
The mine was scheduled initially by quarters for 2 years and then in years for remainder of the LOM.
The target production was 100 000 t of feed to the processing plant per annum, with the feed coming
from both the east and west pits simultaneously.
The mine production schedule was developed in four phases. Years 1 and 2 were scheduled using
selective mining units (SMUs) 25 m x 15 m by 5 m high (equivalent to 5 062.5 t). The blocks were
scheduled in monthly periods producing and average of 8 333 t of ROM material per month. The
second phase of scheduling was year three, when the SMUs were scaled up to 100 m by 30 m by 5
m (20 250 t) and scheduled in quarters producing approximately 25 000 t of PEM per quarter. After
Year 3 through to Year 10, the mine was scheduled by years producing 100 000 t of PEM per annum.
The remainder of the LOM was scheduled in 5 year increments to a LOM that was just over 18 years.
The Mine waste was hauled to waste tips above the West Pit and in the vicinity of the existing waste
tips above the East Pit.
16.6.2.1 MINE OPENING DEVELOPMENT
The mine production schedule includes the opening cuts and re-start of mining operations in the East
Pit as well as the start of mining in the West Pit. The start of mining operations was driven by
maintaining a relatively low strip ratio. This was achieved by using a low revenue factor Whittle shell
as a starting point for the mining. Golder used the RF 0.7 pit for the opening cut design to minimise
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 127
the strip ratio and to start mining in relatively higher value ground. The RF 0.7 pits are illustrated in
Figure 16-15.
Figure 16-15: RF 0.7 Whittle Shells Used as the Starting Point for Mining in the East and West Pits
16.6.2.2 YEAR 1 – 2 MINE ADVANCE
The mine stripping and waste development starts against the north highwall in both of the pits and
progresses west and down, bench-by-bench to expose the graphite mineralisation. The East Pit is
mined along the north wall to expose the final pit wall that is coincident with both the RF 1.0 and
RF 0.7 pits. The West Pit is developed in a similar manner starting in early Year 2. The end of year
status maps are shown in Figure 16-16.
Year 1
Year 2
Figure 16-16: Kringelgruvan Status Map – Up to End of Year 2
West Pit
East Pit Starter Pits
N th
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 128
The mine produces the target PEM tonnage of 100 000 t in both years 1 and 2. The low production
rate and minimised waste stripping enable the fast plant feed ramp up and maximised process plant
utilisation. The monthly, for Year 1 and Quarterly production schedule with the rolling waste to PEM
ratio is charted in Figure 16-17.
Figure 16-17: Kringelgruvan 2 Year Mining Schedule
The pits are relatively high strip ratio pits at 4.4 and 6.1 for the East and West pits respectively.
Whilst the overall strategy to minimise the waste transport in the early years is achieved there are still
requirements for exposing the PEM on the lower benches. This has resulted in a variable strip ratio
over short periods but the overall stripping, on a larger timescale is consistent with the objective of
minimising waste generation and the stripping costs. The total production in years one and two are
summarised in Table 16-17. The Graphite production is the processed recovered tonnage of product
at a recovery of 85 % graphite from the ROM feed.
Table 16-17: Summary of the Year 1 - 2 Production Schedule
Item Units TOTAL
Waste (inclusive of ob) Tonne 798 483
Waste (exclusive of ob) Tonne 753 332
Graphite Tonne 17 879
A-type graphite Tonne 17 630
C-type graphite Tonne 249
Strip ratio (waste:ROM) Waste Tonne/ROM Tonne 4.0
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 129
Item Units TOTAL
ROM tonne Tonne 200 000
Total tonne Tonne 960 363
The mine advance is illustrated in Figure 16-18 for Year 1 and Figure 16-19 for Year 2. In Year 1 the
East Pit is developed from the existing topography down to the 220 m elevation. The waste dump
rises from the existing topography nominally at the 230 m elevation to a level surface at the 245 m
elevation.
Figure 16-18: End of Year 1 Status Map
In Year 2 (Figure 16-19) the pit floor in the East pit is at approximately the 215 m bench and in the
West pit, the development has reached the 215 m elevation. The main waste dump has risen to the
250 m elevation during this period.
240 m 220 m
245 m
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 130
Figure 16-19: End of Year 2 Status Map
16.6.2.3 YEAR 3 MINE ADVANCE
Golder continued the scheduling through to Year 3 with the results charted in Figure 16-20 and
tabulated in Table 16-18. The total PEM production is 300 000 t over the three years with 1.3 Mt of
waste for a project to date strip ratio of 4.4. There are 26 500 t of graphite produced in the first three
years of production.
220 m 215 m 215 m 225 m
250 m
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 131
Figure 16-20: Kringelgruvan Production Schedule to Year 3
Table 16-18: Kringelgruvan Schedule to the End of Year 3
Item Units TOTAL
Waste tonne (inclusive of ob) Tonne 1 309 319
Waste tonne (exclusive of ob) Tonne 1 230 832
Graphite Tonne 26 432
A-type graphite Tonne 26 183
C-type graphite Tonne 249
Strip ratio (waste:ROM) Waste Tonne/ROM Tonne 4.4
ROM tonne Tonne 300 000
Total tonne Tonne 1 585 648
The strip ratio in Year 3 is marginally higher and continues to increase somewhat to account for
deferred waste mining in Year 1 and 2 of the plan.
Mine development in Year 3 is mapped in Figure 16-21. The East pit is well established by this time
and the opening cut in the West Pit progressed on the 215 m bench further to the west. The waste
dump crest is at 255 m.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 132
Figure 16-21: End of Year 3 Status Map
16.6.2.4 YEAR 10 MINE ADVANCE
The 10 year schedule continues mining in both the East and West pits. At the end of Year 10,
1 M tonnes of PEM have been mined and 85.3 kt of graphite had been produced. The waste moved
is 5.6 M tonnes. The PEM to waste ratio increases in this period from 4.4 to 5.6 due to the increased
depth of mining. The 10 year schedule is charted in Figure 16-22 and summarised in Table 16-19.
255 m
215 m 230 m
215 m225 m
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 133
Figure 16-22: Kringelgruvan 10 Year Production Schedule
Table 16-19: Kringelgruvan 10 Year Mine Production Schedule
Item Units TOTAL
Waste tonne (inclusive of ob) Tonne 5 558 148
Waste tonne (exclusive of ob) Tonne 5 348 296
Graphite Tonne 85 316
A-type graphite Tonne 84 879
C-type graphite Tonne 437
Strip ratio (waste:ROM) Waste Tonne/ROM Tonne 5.6
ROM tonne Tonne 1 000 000
Total tonne Tonne 6 438 089
Mine development (Figure 16-23) between years 3 and 10 has almost completed the East Pit, which
has three benches remaining. The West Pit continued to expand to the west along the final north
wall. The waste dump had raised a total of 55 m from the toe to 285 m elevation.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 134
Figure 16-23: End of Year 10 Status Map
16.6.2.5 LOM SCHEDULE
The LOM extends to approximately 19 years at the proposed production rate of 100 000 t/a. Both of
the pits are mined out and the waste tip is fully stacked. The waste to PEM ratio starts to decrease in
the later years because the benches are increasingly PEM-only or contain a high proportion of
graphite per bench. The LOM schedule is charted in Figure 16-24.
205 m
210 m 220 m
285 m
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 135
Figure 16-24: Kringelgruvan LOM Schedule
The total PEM and waste mined over the 19 years equate to just over 9.6 M tonnes of waste and 1.9
M tonnes of PEM producing 166.2 kt of graphite. The final totals of mined material are summarised in
Table 16-20.
Table 16-20: Kringelgruvan LOM Production Summary
Item Units TOTAL
Waste tonne (inclusive of ob) Tonne 9 598 843
Waste tonne (exclusive of ob) Tonne 9 363 466
Overburden Tonne 826 173
Graphite Tonne 166 229
A-type graphite Tonne 165 782
C-type graphite Waste Tonne/ROM Tonne 448
Strip ratio (waste:ROM) Tonne 5.1
ROM tonne Tonne 1 898 739
Total tonne Tonne 11 062 461
The final status map of the site is shown in Figure 16-25.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 136
Figure 16-25: End of Mine Status Map
Figure 16-26: Site Overview
170 m 180 m
170 m
200 m 190 m
315 m
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 137
16.7 OPEN PIT MINING OPERATIONS
16.7.1 DRILLING AND BLASTING
Explosives will be used to fragment both the waste and mineralised rock. The blasted material will
then be sized and crushed to feed the process plant. The typical geometry of a drill and blast pattern
is illustrated in Figure 16-27.
Figure 16-27: Open Pit Drill and Blast Geometry (courtesy of DynoNobel.com)
The commercial explosive used for blasting will be an emulsion due to its relatively low cost, ease of
loading and safety. Typical emulsion product is a mixture of ammonium nitrate acting as an oxidiser
and diesel fuel oil in a stabilised liquid state with a gassing agent. The product density ranges
between 1.15 g/cm3 to 1.25 g/cm3. The drill and blast parameters are listed in
Table 16-21.
Table 16-21: Drill and Blast Parameters
Parameter Units Value
Rock Density (wet) g/cc 2.80
Bench Height, BH m 5
Explosive Diameter, D mm 64
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 138
Parameter Units Value
Explosive Density g/cc 1.20
Explosive Energy, AWS j/g 3 290
Burden, B (25-40D) m 2.1
Burden Stiffness (2.0<BS<3.5) BH/B 2.4
Spacing (=1.15B), S m 2.4
Stemming Length (0.7B), SL m 1.5
Energy Distribution % 70 %
Sub-Drill (BH x 3-15D), SD m 0.4
Blasthole Length, L m 5.4
Explosive Length, C m 3.9
Explosive Loading Density kg/m 3.86
Explosive Weight kg/hole 15.1
Explosive Energy kJ/hole 49 679
Volume Shot, V bcm/hole 25
Mass Shot, T t/hole 70
Powder Factor, PF kg/bcm 0.60
Powder Factor, PF kg/t 0.22
Energy Factor kJ/t 710
Control blasting of the final walls should be conducted as a matter of good mining practice. The
drilling and blasting pattern for pre-split blasts are based on the geometry of the production blasts
summarised in Table 16-21. The pre-split blasts are drilled using a 1.00 m burden and 0.77 m
spacing from the last production row on the bench. A typical blast plan and design is shown in
Figure 16-28.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 139
Figure 16-28: Typical Blast Pattern Design
Loading of explosives will be undertaken using a custom built bulk pumping truck vehicle. Blasts will
be fired using a non-electric down-hole delay initiation system. Production blasts patterns will be
blasted at fixed times during the day and no later than 6:00 pm. Notification of blasts will be
performed as per Swedish regulations and an alarm will always sound prior to production blasts
several minutes in advance.
16.7.2 GRADE CONTROL
Poor grade control of PEM during mine operations can contribute to dilution and decreased mineral
recovery and consequently will reduce the head grade of the mill feed and displace economic material
in the processing stream.
PEM grade control guidelines are provided below:
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 140
16.7.2.1 PRIOR TO BENCH PRODUCTION
Geological mapping and sample collection on production benches. Chip or channel samples
can be taken along benches and walls, and blasthole cuttings can be sampled and analysed
in a lab. Additional check samples can be taken from the blasted muck piles;
Monitor and map blast holes during drilling to identify the waste-PEM contact locations; and,
The block model bench should be reconciled with the field observations listed above.
16.7.2.2 DURING PRODUCTION
Visit production benches daily to monitor for dilution and estimate the ROM grade. All oversize
material should be stored in a re-handle area until a geologist can assess if it is PEM or waste, and
operations personnel should periodically collect grab samples, either from an excavator bucket or
from a storage/re-handle area. The excavator operator can be supplied with sample bags and tags,
and assign a prescribed percentage of the production to be sampled (i.e. one sample for every ten
buckets).
16.7.2.3 STOCKPILING STRATEGY
All of the ROM feed reports to a ROM pad situated adjacent to the processing plant. The stockpile is
designed to hold approximately one week of feed material for the processing plant. In the winter
months the pad live stockpile should be reduced to minimize the risk of parts of the pile freezing.
Low grade PEM could be stockpiled to be processed at a later date in the event of open pit production
issues or to be blended with very high grade PEM. Further analysis of the economics of storing and
re-handling low grade material should be conducted as part of the operating strategy of the mine and
processing facilities.
16.7.3 MINING EQUIPMENT SELECTION
Mining the Kringelgruvan deposit is envisioned as an open-pit mine using haul trucks, a hydraulic
shovel, and a front-end loader operated by a mining contractor. A wheel loader will be employed at
the ROM pad area where the machine will make frequent moves between the stockpiles and the
crusher, feeding to the processing plant.
Golder has estimated the productivity of the proposed excavator fleet for both PEM and waste
handling. The production estimate inputs and results are found in Table 16-22.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 141
Table 16-22: Kringelgruvan Prime Loading Unit Productivity Estimate
Parameter Units Cat 385 Exc Cat 385 Exc Cat 938 FEL Cat 938 FEL
Bucket Size m3 3.90 3.90 2.30 2.30
Fill Factor 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
Material PEM Waste PEM Waste
Bulk Density t/m3 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70
Swell 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30
Bucket Load BCM 2.70 2.70 1.59 1.59
Bucket Load Tonnes 7.29 7.29 4.30 4.30
Nominal Truck Payload Tonnes 40 40 40 40
Calc. Passes to Fill 5.5 5.5 9.3 9.3
Use Passes to Fill 5.0 5.0 9.0 9.0
Calc. Truck Payload 36.5 36.5 38.7 38.7
Load Factor 91.1 % 91.1 % 96.7 % 96.7 %
Time Per Pass Minutes 0.50 0.50 0.75 0.75
Load Time Minutes 2.50 2.50 6.75 6.75
Spot Minutes 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
Load + Spot Minutes 3.25 3.25 7.50 7.50
Efficiency Minutes/hr 50 50 50 50
Propel Factor 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
Presentation Factor 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Productivity t/hr 533 533 245 245
Productivity BCM/hr 197 197 91 91
Scheduled h/a Hours 5,280 5,280 5,280 5,280
Mechanical Availability 85.0 % 85.0 % 85.0 % 85.0 %
Use of Availability 75.0 % 80.0 % 75.0 % 80.0 %
Utilisation 63.8 % 68.0 % 63.8 % 68.0 %
Operating h/a Hours 3 366 3 590 3 366 3 590
Production/Year Tonnes 1 793 172 1 912 717 824 859 879 850
Production/Year BCM 664 138 708 414 305 503 325 870
The selected equipment is capable of excavating the required tonnages to maintain steady operation
and production from the mine. The mobile plant estimates are based on expected productivities for
similar mining operations. Because the mine is contractor operated, the mining contractor is expected
to select, use and dispatch an appropriate fleet to complete the mining tasks. The contractor fleet
may vary from what Golder has proposed in the following tables.
Primary mine production is achieved using the equipment listed in Table 16-23. A swell factor of
30 % was assumed for both graphite and waste material when it was blasted and excavated.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 142
Table 16-23: Preliminary Mine Equipment List
Equipment Description Quantity
Hydraulic shovels CAT 385 – 5.54 LCM 1
Front-end Loaders CAT 938 – 2.3 m3 1
Rear-dump Trucks CAT 771 – 40.8-Tonne Payload 3
Rotary drills Sandvik D25KS – 172-mm,124-kN Pull-down 1
Bulldozers CAT D6 – 112 kW 1
Graders CAT 12M – 129 kW 1
Water tankers 9 500-liter – 283-kW Truck 1
Service/tire trucks 4 000-kg Crane – 15 000-kg GVWR Chassis 1
Bulk trucks 272 kg/min (26.8 m3) hopper 1
Light plants 9-m Trailer Mounted, 4 x 1000 Watt Flood 3
Pumps 200-gpm, Centrifugal Trash Pumps, 4 kW 2
Pickup trucks 1-ton 4x4 2
Material will be drill and blasted using a bulk emulsion product. The loading of bulk explosives into
blast holes will be conducted using a bulk mixing and pumping truck. One bulk powder truck will be
required for the mining operations at Kringelgruvan. A single drill rig will be required for drilling
operations.
16.7.4 MINE WORKFORCE AND ORGANISATION
16.7.4.1 MINING WORKFORCE
The mining will be conducted by a mining contractor retained to operate and maintain the production
and service equipment. Golder has estimated the number of mobile plant units (Table 16-23) and
used the fleet size to estimate the number of operators and maintenance staff on each shift required
to sustain the operation of the mine. The estimated workforce each shift is summarised in
Table 16-24.
The mining contractor will be tasked with managing both the equipment fleet and workforce in order to
achieve the planned production targets at the budgeted unit costs. The mining contractor planned
workforce may vary from Golder’s estimates of the required labour needed to execute the mine plan.
Table 16-24: Mining Workforce Estimate
Equipment Quantity Operators per Shift
Hydraulic excavators 1 1
Front-end Loaders/Bulldozer 1 1
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 143
Equipment Quantity Operators per Shift
Rear-dump Trucks 2 2
Rotary drills 1 1
Bulldozers 1 N/A
Graders 1 1
Water tankers 1 N/A
Service/tire trucks 1 N/A
Bulk trucks 1 N/A
Light plants 3 N/A
Pumps 2 N/A
Pickup trucks 2 N/A
Total 17 6
To determine the size of the contractor crews required to operate the mine Golder assumed that two
crews working eight hour shifts seven days a week would operate the mine. To allow two working
crews and two crews on a rest cycle will require a total workforce of 24 employees, not including
contractor maintenance crews, supervision or management.
16.7.4.2 MINE STAFFING
Golder has estimated the number of full time staff employees required to manage and operate the
mine. The mine Technical Services department is outlined in Table 16-25. The total mine technical
staff is estimated to be 2 in total. Note that additional positions are required for the mine accounting,
health safety and environment and other supporting groups.
Table 16-25: Estimated Mine Staffing Requirement
Position Per shift
Mine Superintendent 1
Chief Geologist 1
Total Staffing 2
The staff on-site as Woxna Graphite employees would be responsible for the daily oversight of the
mine. Other roles such as mine planning and pit slope monitoring would be out-sourced on an as
required basis over the life of the mine.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 144
16.7.4.3 MINE STAFF ORGANISATION
Golder has developed a mine technical services department organogram for Woxna Graphite see
Figure 16-29. The organisation is based on a typical small mining and geology group. The Technical
Services Superintendent (TSS) is responsible for all of the on-site company, consultant and contractor
activities. The TSS liaises directly with their equivalent in the mine contractor organisation and
ensures that planning, design and regular surveying for the site is conducted.
Figure 16-29: Woxna Graphite Mine Technical Services Department Organogram
16.8 WASTE ROCK STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT FACILITY
16.8.1 WASTE CHARACTERISATION
16.8.1.1 NEUTRALISATION POTENTIAL
The Acid Rock Drainage (ARD) generation potential is determined by a static test called Acid Base
Accounting (ABA). The ABA procedure is based on the calculation of the Acid Potential (AP) and the
Neutralization Potential (MPA). According to the current legislation for defining inert mining waste
(SFS2008:722, based on directive 2006/21/EC and 2009/359/EC) the following apply.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 145
Waste shall be considered as being inert waste, within the meaning of Article 3 (3) of
Directive 2006/21/EC, where all of the following criteria, are fulfilled in both the short and the
long term:
Waste will not undergo any significant disintegration or dissolution or other significant
change likely to cause any adverse environmental effect or harm human health;
Waste has a maximum content of sulphide sulphur of 0.1 %, or waste has a maximum
content of sulphide sulphur of 1 % and the neutralising potential ratio, defined as the ratio
between the neutralising potential and the acid potential, and determined on the basis of
a static test EN 15875 is greater than 3;
Waste presents no risk of self-combustion and will not burn;
Content of substances potentially harmful to the environment or human health in the
waste, and in particular As, Cd, Co, Cr, Cu, Hg, Mo, Ni, Pb, V and Zn, including in any
fine particles alone of waste, is sufficiently low to be of insignificant human and ecological
risk, in both the short and the long term. In order to be considered as sufficiently low to
be of insignificant human and ecological risk, the content of these substances shall not
exceed national threshold values for sites identified as not contaminated or relevant
national natural background levels; and
Waste is substantially free of products used in extraction or processing that could harm
the environment or human health.
⁄
The following three steps are performed in order to obtain NP and AP values:
Acid Production (MPA) determination;
Acid Consumption (NP) determination; and
Neutralization Potential Ratio calculation (NPR).
Theoretically, waste rock material possessing NPR values above 1 have no potential for acidification
whereas waste rock with NPR values below 1 demonstrate a risk potential. In practice, a safety factor
is applied and waste material with a NPR value greater than or equal to 3 is generally regarded as
having no acidification potential.
The ABA test does not distinguish between mineralogical differences and the NP values are often
overestimated (Lawrence & Scheske, 1997). The material mineralogy is a very important parameter
influencing ARD generating potential due to different minerals ability or inability to neutralize acid
drainage in different pH range.
The LOM production schedules tracks mine waste NPR generated by bench per phase and is based
on NPR values estimated from the geological block model provided by Woxna.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 146
16.8.1.2 WASTE ROCK CHARACTERISATION
NPR and Sulphur values were interpolated into the geological block model provided by Woxna.
These values could be used to predict the ARD potential generation of the waste material.
The description for the different waste material categories used to classify different ARD generating
levels are:
A: if NP/MPA ratio ≥ 3: unlikely to generate ARD – low acidification potential; and
B: if NP/MPA ratio < 3: likely to generate ARD – high acidification potential.
16.8.1.3 WASTE ROCK MANAGEMENT
For the purpose of this PEA, no waste rock management plan was developed but the LOM production
schedule could enable the development of such a plan as the NPR and sulphur values have been
tracked in the schedule. Such a plan could allow for the potential separation of low potential
generating waste material from the high potential generating waste material in different waste storage
facilities based on the anticipated sulphur and NPR values within the waste rock. As such, waste
material could be categorized and managed selectively based on their ARD generating potential as
follows:
A category: could be stored in a waste dump or used as construction material for the tailings
embankment; and
B category: need to be deposited in a specific waste storage management facility suitable for
preventing and handling ARD generation.
16.8.2 WASTE STORAGE FACILITIES DESIGN AND STORAGE CONSTRAINTS
The following design constraints were assumed for design and development of the rock stockpiles:
Overall face angle of ex-pit rock stockpiles of 33 °;
Natural angle of repose for the waste rock is approximately 38 °;
Nominal height of rock stockpile lift: 10 m;
Catch bench between rock stockpile toe and crest not to be less than 5 m giving 3:1 overall
slope;
In areas where lift height exceeds 10 m, a protocol will need to be developed to ensure safe
working practices. This protocol will need to include monitoring stockpile movement,
development of criteria for cessation of placement, and techniques to safely place over high
banks such as opening and closing sectors of the crest to allow time for the material to
stabilize;
Material swell factor 30 % in the truck;
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 147
Material volume assumed to be the same as the bank volume once placed and stored in the
waste dump;
Rock stockpile footprints to be inspected for natural springs, permafrost and should be auger
drilled to evaluate geotechnical conditions prior to placement; and
Offset from ultimate pit high walls a distance equivalent to half of the depth of the pit that
borders the rock stockpiles.
The preliminary dump designs for the project were developed to minimize haulage and associated
costs and store up to 4.9 M loose m3 (LCM) or 10.6 M tonnes of waste. This was accomplished by
taking advantage of topography to the north of the deposit. It should be noted that the extents of the
preliminary dump locations remained inside of the Freehold lease boundaries. The waste dump
configuration and capacity can be changed to reflect any future changes to the project boundary.
The dumps were not scheduled to manage ARD generation. Consideration should be given to the
proper separation and development of potential ARD dumps in a feasibility study. Table 16-26 shows
the waste dump capacity and Figure 16-30 shows the preliminary dump location. Overburden
quantities were estimated and tracked in the LOM schedule.
Table 16-26: Dump Storage Capacity by Elevation
Elevation Area Volume Tonnage
235 1 900 19 004 51 311
245 32 475 324 750 876 825
255 48 629 486 286 1 312 972
265 51 014 510 143 1 377 386
275 52 828 528 275 1 426 343
285 75 588 755 884 2 040 887
295 54 967 549 667 1 484 101
305 30 630 306 295 826 997
315 10 446 104 461 282 045
Total 358 477 3 584 765 9 678 866
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 148
Figure 16-30: Location of the Waste Storage Area
16.9 MINING INFRASTRUCTURES
16.9.1 PERSONNEL INFRASTRUCTURE
A special fuel depot will be constructed in the northern part of the industrial area to supply the mining
fleet. The contractors involved with mining activities at the site have the option to construct an
additional fuel depot within the industrial area.
The mining contractor will be self-contained with regard to sanitary waste system since there is
currently no existing facility able to accommodate an increase in the site work force.
16.9.2 ELECTRICAL POWER
The pit shell suggests the existing power line narrowly cuts across the mineralisation on the south
west side of the mining concession and will need to be moved before mining production year 2 or
after 1.6 M tonnes of material have been mined. This is due to the presence of the West Pit ramp
being located on the south wall of the pit.
Waste Dump
East Pit
West Pit
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 149
Figure 16-31: Power Line and Pit Interaction
It is believed that additional geotechnical information and mine optimisation and design iterations will
enable an improved ramp location and pit wall design in the vicinity of the power line, thus deferring
its movement until nominally year 4 of production.
Electric power for the open pits is anticipated to be limited to supplying energy to the in-pit dewatering
pumps. There is a power connection to the existing pit.
16.9.3 EXPLOSIVES STORAGE
The commercial explosive used for blasting will be emulsion due to its relatively low cost, ease of
loading and safety.
Detonators, primers, and stick powder will be stored in a magazine complying with the new Swedish
statute for the storage of explosives, MSBFS 2010:5. The explosive storage facility will provide
storage for approximately one week of explosive consumption. The magazine storage for explosives
will be located in a secure location at a distance from other buildings consistent with Swedish
regulations MSBFS 2010:5. All of the blasting practices will comply with Swedish regulations in force
during mine operation.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 150
SECTION 17 RECOVERY METHODS
There is an existing plant at Woxna for processing the graphite PEM. This plant was last used in
2001. It is the intention of the Woxna Graphite Restart Project to utilise existing facilities and
infrastructure where possible.
17.1 HISTORY AND BACKGROUND
The original plant was built in 1996 with trial product delivery in December, 1996. Officially,
production started in March 1997. The plant extension took place in 1998 with an objective to
increase the throughput capacity and the product recovery. A rod mill was installed and an additional
flotation circuit was established. Three new column cells were installed at this time to improve the
efficiency of the fines flotation process.
Additional refurbishment/expansion of the plant took place in 1999, with installation of two additional
regrinding mills in order to increase the number of regrinding/flotation steps to three. To obtain
cleaner material from the rougher flotation, two stage cleaning of the rougher concentrate was
included, where the first two cells were used for cleaning and the four remaining for
rougher/scavenger flotation. An additional three flotation cells were used to float coarse particles
before it went to tailings in order to improve the total recovery. Blending equipment was installed to
make it possible to produce and sell more customised products with regard to grain size and carbon
contents.
In 2000, the feed arrangement to the drier was improved and the dry screening was improved
resulting in both better quantity and quality in the screening process. Automatic sampling was
installed at crucial points in the plant.
Most of the equipment in the comminution and flotation circuits was second hand equipment taken
from other mines.
17.2 BASIS FOR DESIGN
The basis for proposed process is the estimated maximum throughput of the existing rod mill and the
flotation process modelled by Aminpro in June 2013. The crushing plant will be new since the
previous one was the mining contractor’s. The flotation, regrinding and dewatering equipment will be
new. The existing dryer and bagging plant will be used for graphite concentrate together with
additional new bagging plant for the coarse high grade graphite.
The process is shown in the block diagram in Figure 17-1.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 151
Figure 17-1: Process Block Diagram
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 152
17.2.1 OPERATING PHILOSOPHY
The crushing plant will be operated 4 hours per 12 hours. The process plant with battery limits from
the silo to the discharge of the dryer will be operated three eight hour shifts per day, seven days per
week.
Major maintenance will be carried out on day shift by contractors and the plant operators will perform
minor maintenance during the rest of the time.
17.2.2 CRUSHING
The crushing was carried out by a contactor and the equipment is no longer available. Options for the
crusher include purchasing and operating or contracting out the crushing operation. GBM proposes
that the crushing plant is owned and operated by Woxna.
The design is based on crushing test work by Metso in 2012. Metso reported that the sample is
abrasive but the crushability is easy. The slippery low-friction nature of the graphite in the material
has been taken into account in selecting the liners. The product from this plant will be 80 % passing
6.35 mm to maximise the throughput of the rod mill.
The ROM material is fed at 70 t/h directly into the ROM bin by a mine haulage truck or from the ROM
stockpile by a front end loader. The ROM has a top size of 600 mm. The ROM is screened by a
vibrating grizzly to remove minus 60 mm particles. The oversize is fed into a jaw crusher where it is
crushed to minus 88 mm. The grizzly undersize and crushed products are transferred by conveyor to
a triple deck vibrating screen where it is screened at 8 mm. The oversize is conveyed to a bin and
then fed by a vibrating feeder to a cone crusher. The crushed product is conveyed back to the triple
deck screen. The crushed product screen undersize, which has 80 % passing 6.35 mm, is transferred
either to the fine ore bin, or using a stacking conveyor stored in an emergency stockpile adjacent to
the crushing plant. Finely crushed product can be loaded by a front end loader from the emergency
stockpile onto the silo feed conveyor via a chute when the crushing plant is down for maintenance.
There is no longer intermediate storage and conveying to the rod mill and therefore, this equipment
requires replacing with either an undercover stockpile or silo to prevent freezing of the crushed
material. GBM proposes a new fine ore bin is installed as part of the new feed delivery equipment with
sufficient capacity that the crushing plant need only be operated for approximately 4 hours every 12
hours.
A new crushing plant with silo is used for the PEA.
17.2.3 MILLING
The rod milling is used to ensure that there is no overgrinding of the graphite. The milling circuit
consists of the existing rod mill and new cyclones. The mill is in closed circuit with cyclones to
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 153
produce a product with 80 % passing 275 µm. The throughput of the mill is calculated to be 21 t/h.
The existing mill is 2.7 m diameter and 3.75 m long. It requires a new 360 kW motor to maximise the
throughput.
The crushed material from the bin is fed onto the rod mill feed conveyor by one vibrating feeder at a
controlled rate of 21 t/h. The mass flow is measured by a weightometer on the conveyor belt which
controls the feed rate to the mill. The mill discharge is screened by a trommel with the oversize being
collected in a bin for recycling to the mill feed on a batch basis. The undersize is pumped to cyclones
for classification at 80 % passing 275 µm. The cyclone underflow flows by gravity to rod mill feed box
for regrinding. Water is added to the mill feed to ensure that the density of the slurry in the mill is 80 %
solids. Water is added to the mill discharge to produce the correct slurry density for the cyclones.
The cyclone overflow is pumped to the flash flotation cell.
For the PEA the existing rod mill with new motor will be used. The feed conveyor, cyclone and
cyclone feed pumps and associated equipment will be new.
17.2.4 FLOTATION
The proposed beneficiation process is simpler than used previously. The old process included
multiple flotation stages with regrinding, sizing and gravity separation. The new circuit will use only
flotation with regrinding, comprising of flash/rougher/scavenger flotation with two stage rougher
concentrate cleaning with regrinding and three stage scavenger concentrate with regrinding.
The cyclone overflow is pumped to the flash flotation where high grade coarse graphite is floated.
This concentrate is reground in a vertical type mill to liberate gangue minerals before being upgraded
twice in column flotation cells with the concentrates being reground before being floated. The tailings
from the final column is recycled to the preceding column and the tailings from the first column is
treated in the scavenger cleaner circuit. The concentrate from this is then pumped to the concentrate
holding tank. The flash flotation tailings is treated in mechanical rougher flotation cells. The
concentrate from this is recycled back to the flash cell. The rougher tailings is treated in a scavenger
flotation circuit comprising of mechanical flotation cells. The initial concentrate is reground and
pumped to the mechanical scavenger flotation cleaner cells. The second concentrate is recycled back
to the feed to the scavenger cells. The scavenger tailings is pumped to a holding tank. The
scavenger cleaner concentrate is cleaned a further two times in flotation columns. The concentrates
are reground before being refloated. The tailings are recycled to the preceding flotation cell. The final
scavenger concentrate is pumped to the concentrate holding tank.
A new flash flotation cell is proposed to recover coarse graphite flakes as soon as possible. Since the
existing Sala/Denver rougher/scavenger and scavenger cleaner flotation cells are in very poor
condition, GBM is proposing that they are replaced by new mechanical and column cells. New cells
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 154
will last longer than reconditioned ones, have better control, and produce better flotation
characteristics, resulting in improved recovery and grade. For the PEA, GBM is using new cells.
Three flotation columns were historically used for cleaning the fines, of which two are suitable for
reuse with some minor modifications. It is there proposed that two columns existing are reused, and
two new columns are installed as the cleaner cells. The wash and air require improving. Therefore
existing and columns are used in the PEA.
It is proposed that the proper air supply is made available by installing a new blower for the
mechanical cells and new compressor for the columns. This is incorporated in the PEA.
The original reagent handling system will be replaced with a more accurate dosing system using
peristaltic pumps. New pumps are included in the PEA.
17.2.5 REGRIND MILLS
The concentrates require regrinding before cleaning to separate the gangue minerals from the
graphite. This will be done by using vertical type mills. The pebble and Svedala agitated mills are old
and require reconditioning. GBM is proposing using 2 refurbished and 5 new SMD mills. The new
units will be marginally easier to operate and maintain, however both can use ceramic grinding media
and will produce a more accurate product than historical steel balls.
The regrind mills operate best at about 50 % solids however the test work showed that the feed
density in the regrind/flotation circuits has to be very low. It is not possible to increase the feed density
hence the regrind will be operated at less than optimal conditions.
17.2.6 DEWATERING
The concentrate from the cleaner flotation is transferred to an agitated holding tank. From here the
concentrate slurry is pumped into a horizontal pressure filter on a batch basis where it will be
dewatered. The concentrate cake will be dropped onto a conveyer and transferred to the existing
thermal dryer for removal of the remaining moisture. The dry product is then transferred to a storage
silo. The filtrate from the filter will be pumped a small holding tank and from there transferred to the
process water tank.
The existing plant used a vacuum drum filter to dewater the concentrate before the drying. This was
apparently not efficient and could only reduce the moisture to 28 %. Recent test work showed that a
pressure filter can handle unthickened feed and filter it to approximately 22 % moisture. The
installation of a pressure filter should enable the dryer to operate at the expanded duty.
The existing dryer was specified to treat 2.0 t/h with a feed of 28 % moisture, with a feed moisture of
22 % the throughput can be increased to approximately 2.8 t/h.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 155
A feed tank, new horizontal pressure filter, and associate equipment is included in the PEA. The
existing dryer and associated equipment will be used.
17.2.7 DRY SCREENING AND BAGGING
The dry graphite concentrate is transferred from the storage silo to a splitter box. This box splits the
concentrate between three vibrating triple deck screens. These screens size the concentrate into four
products; minus 80 µm, 80 µm to 160 µm, 160 µm to 250 µm and greater than 250 µm. The plus
250 µm fraction is conveyed to a bagging plant where the premium jumbo concentrate is bagged in
one tonne bulk bags for dispatch. The minus 250 µm fractions are transferred to separate storage
silos before being conveyed to a bagging plant where the concentrates are bagged in one tonne bulk
bags for dispatch.
The existing dry screens have three decks although they only produced three sizes as the top deck
was used to relieve the second deck. It is planned to produce a +250 µm product by replacing the top
deck with the correct screen aperture to screen out the +250 µm fraction.
Two existing dry screens will be used and a third will be new. The transfer of the +250 µm fraction will
be via new tubular drag conveyor from the screens to a new dedicated bagging plant. The rest of the
equipment is existing refurbished equipment. Therefore the PEA includes a new screen, conveyors
for the +250 µm fraction and bagging plant. The PEA provides for the replacement of the external
bucket elevators, which transfer the graphite fractions to the silos, and renovation of the silos.
17.2.8 TAILINGS
The final tailings from the flotation circuit is pumped to the tailings management facility (TMF).
The existing tailings tank with the existing two stage pumping system, with new two stage stand-by
pumps will be used. The first pump is fixed speed and the second variable speed.
17.2.9 WATER
The process water is pumped through the plant from the water tank using the existing ringmain.
Tailings decant water is pumped back from the TMF to the new acid rock drainage (ARD) treatment
plant. Acidic water will be contacted with lime, and neutralised in an ARD agitated tank. The
neutralised water is pumped to a clarifier where the precipitate is settled out using flocculant. A
portion of the clarifier underflow is recycled to the ARD tank to improve the formation of precipitates.
The remaining underflow is pumped to the tailings sump. The clarifier overflow is pumped to the
process water tank for recycling in the plant.
Filtrate from the concentrate filter will be pumped to the clarifier.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 156
There are certain operations which require clean water, for example, gland service, and the existing
plant does not have a facility for this, so GBM proposes installing a small fresh water tank and running
the gland seal pump off it. A borehole pump supplies the fresh water.
The existing water circuits for process water and hosing will be used. A new fresh water tank and
piping will be installed and the existing gland seal pumps will be used. The ARD tank, pumps, and
clarifier will be new. The lime addition equipment will use existing equipment.
17.2.10 SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS
Automatic samples are taken from the cyclone overflow, scavenger and scavenger cleaner tailings,
rougher cleaner and scavenger cleaner concentrates.
Manual samples are taken from the fresh feed to the rod mill, various concentrate and tailings flows in
the flotation circuits and from the bagged product.
An on-site laboratory is used to assay the mine and process samples for sulphur and carbon.
Moisture and size analyses are also done in this laboratory.
17.2.11 ANCILLARY FACILITIES
The air for the mechanical flotation cells is provided by a new dedicated blower. Air for the flotation
columns is provided by a new dedicated air compressor. Instrument and general plant air is supplied
by the existing air compressor.
New and existing air equipment is located in the decommissioned milling room.
Flotation reagents are dosed using new peristaltic pumps to the flotation cells and columns from the
storage containers. Reagents will be purchased and delivered in ready to dose form and will be
pumped directly from their delivery vessel.
17.3 IMPROVEMENTS TO THE PLANT
17.3.1 CONDITION OF THE EXISTING EQUIPMENT
The existing plant is in poor condition, and was operated in 1996 using mostly used equipment. The
plant was subsequently modified to increase capacity and improve the product quality and recovery.
From GBM's site visit in 2012 it is assumed that the plant was not properly shut down in 2001, and
has not been kept under a proper care and maintenance programme.
Some of the equipment has been removed, for example, the drum filter, and some has been used for
retreating old concentrate, for example, the dryer and bagging plant. Pumps and piping have been
relocated and used for other purposes within the plant.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 157
GBM is proposing to renovate the existing equipment which is proposed to be used in the new
process, that is, rod mill, two regrind mills, flotation columns, dryer, screens, and bagging plant. The
remaining the equipment will be new, for example, cyclone, flotation cells, three regrind mills,
dewatering filter, air compressors, pumps, and acid neutralising circuit.
An assessment of the work required to refurbish the required existing equipment, and the costs
included in the capital estimate are representative of the best estimate for these repairs.
17.4 BASIS FOR THE ESTIMATE OF GRAPHITE PRODUCTION
17.4.1 CRITERIA
The following criteria have been used to size the equipment.
Table 17-1: Crushing Criteria
Item Description Unit Phase 1
Operating schedule
Days per year d 365
Hours per day h 8
Utilisation % 75
Operating h/a h 2190
Annual tonnage crushed kt 155 000
Primary crushing rate – design t/h 70
Moisture content % 5.0
Density kg/m³ 2720
Bulk density t/m3 1.6
Crusher feed size - nominal mm 600
Crusher product d80 – nominal mm 6.35
Table 17-2: Fine Ore Bin Parameters
Item Description Unit
Bin type - Silo
Live capacity (mill feed) h 6
Live capacity t 100
Number of draw points - 2
Feeder type - Vibrating
Quantity installed - 2
Quantity operating – normal - 1
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 158
Item Description Unit
Design tonnage (each) - maximum t/h 36
Table 17-3: Primary Milling Criteria
Item Description Unit
Operating schedule
Days per annum d/a 365
Hours per day h/d 24
Utilisation % 85.0
Operating h/a h/a 7 446
Fresh mill feed t/h 20.8
Mill feed moisture content % 5.0
Mill type Rod
Mill dimensions
Diameter m 2.7
Length m 3.6
Speed
Normal % of critical 67
Power draw at normal conditions kW 250
Rod load
Normal % of mill volume 35
Maximum % of mill volume 50
Make-up rod diameter mm 75
Rod material - Steel
Liner material - Rubber
Mill discharge density % solids 80
Trommel undersize launder transport density % solids 80
Mill cyclone
Cyclone underflow % solids 77
Cyclone overflow % solids 33
Circulating load ratio % 250
Overflow size p80 µm 275
Table 17-4: Flash Flotation Criteria
Item Description Unit
Feed grade
Carbon % 10.3
Type of flotation cell - Column
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 159
Item Description Unit
Quantity of flotation cells - 1
Residence time min 3.1
Volume per cell m3 1
Air flow per cell Nm3/h 56.5
Table 17-5: Rougher Flotation Criteria
Item Description Unit
Type of flotation cell - Mechanical
Quantity of flotation cells - 3
Residence time min 10.3
Volume per cell m3 3
Air flow per cell Nm3/h 514.3
Table 17-6: Scavenger 1 Flotation Criteria
Item Description Unit
Type of flotation cell - Mechanical
Quantity of flotation cells - 2
Residence time min 6.3
Volume per cell m3 3
Air flow per cell Nm3/h 342.9
Table 17-7: Scavenger 2 Flotation Criteria
Item Description Unit
Type of flotation cell - Mechanical
Quantity of flotation cells - 4
Residence time min 13.6
Volume per cell m3 3
Air flow per cell Nm3/h 685.7
Table 17-8: Scavenger Cleaner 1 Flotation Criteria
Item Description Unit
Type of flotation cell - Column
Quantity of flotation cells - 1
Residence time min 14.4
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 160
Item Description Unit
Volume per cell m3 3
Air flow per cell Nm3/h 1028.6
Table 17-9: Scavenger Cleaner 2 Flotation Criteria
Item Description Unit
Type of flotation cell - Column
Quantity of flotation cells - 1
Residence time min 10.6
Volume per cell m3 8
Air flow per cell Nm3/h 144.8
Table 17-10: Scavenger Cleaner 3 Flotation Criteria
Item Description Unit
Type of flotation cell - Column
Quantity of flotation cells - 1
Residence time min 8.1
Volume per cell m3 3.1
Air flow per cell Nm3/h 56.5
Table 17-11: Rougher Cleaner 1 Flotation Criteria
Item Description Unit
Type of flotation cell - Column
Quantity of flotation cells - 1
Residence time min 49.9
Volume per cell m3 30.2
Air flow per cell Nm3/h 144.8
Table 17-12: Rougher Cleaner 2 Flotation Criteria
Item Description Unit
Type of flotation cell - Column
Quantity of flotation cells - 1
Residence time min 62.4
Volume per cell m3 20.1
Air flow per cell Nm3/h 144.8
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 161
Table 17-13: Regrind Mill Criteria (all SMD’s)
Feed from Flash Flotation
Concentrate
Rougher Cleaner 1
Concentrate
Scavenger 1 Concentrate
Scavenger Cleaner 1
Concentrate
Scavenger Cleaner 2
Concentrate
Solids t/h 1.5 1.2 1.3 2.1 1.8
Feed % solids 26 5.8 2.6 6.5 2.3
Feed F80 µm 317 263 302 218 217
Prod P80 µm 282 226 271 202 197
Wi Overall 42.4 29.2 45.1 37.8 42.9
Power kW 2.4 1.2 2.4 4.8 4.8
Table 17-14: Concentrate Dewatering Criteria
Item Description Unit
Feed solids t/h 2.2
Holding tank capacity h 6
Feed Solids moisture % 89
Cake Solids moisture % 20
Solids flux t/(m² h) 0.2
Table 17-15: Bagging Plant
Item Description Unit Premium
Concentrate Coarse
Concentrate Medium
Concentrate Fine
concentrate
Operating time h/d 24 24 24 24
Graphite production t/d 9.9 11.5 15.2 17.2
Bulk density kg/m³ 550 550 550 420
Bag capacity t 1 1 1 1
Average bagging rates bags/d 10 12 15 17
bags/h 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Table 17-16: Flotation Reagent Requirements
Unit (mill feed) MIBC Diesel Sodium Silicate
Flash
Rougher 1
Rougher 2
Scavenger 1
Rougher Cleaner 1
Rougher Cleaner 2
Scavenger cleaner 1
g/t
g/t
g/t
g/t
g/t
g/t
g/t
40
-
-
20
5
2
10
10
-
-
5
1
-
1
5
-
-
15
25
20
25
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 162
Unit (mill feed) MIBC Diesel Sodium Silicate
Scavenger cleaner 2
Scavenger cleaner 3
g/t
g/t
10
10
1
1
20
15
17.4.2 THROUGHPUT
The initial throughout is 100 000 t/a based on the existing Permit. It is expected that the Permit can be
extended to allow a greater throughput after approximately one year. Therefore the nominal
throughput of the plant is 155 000 t/a. This is based on the maximum that can be milled in the
existing rod mill and an estimated running time efficiency of 85 %. This efficiency is relatively low but
takes into account the small amount of buffering between circuits and the proposed operating
procedure where the operators take responsibility of maintenance during afternoon and night shifts.
The crushed throughput, 70 t/h, is based on the smallest crushing plant capable of crushing to
6.35 mm.
The mill throughput of 20.8 t/h is based on the maximum tonnage that can be milled to 80 % passing
270 µm in the existing rod mill.
The flotation section is based on the 20.8 t/h
The proposed flotation flowsheet and equipment sizes are based on the test work carried out by
Aminpro in 2013. Aminpro modelled the results of the tests to produce a flowsheet with mass balance
and flotation equipment sizes. The predicted graphite concentrate grade and recovery are based on
the locked cycle flotation test.
17.4.3 POTENTIAL FOR INCREASING THROUGHPUT
The throughput of the plant has been limited by the capacity of the existing rod mill for primary milling,
however, there is the option to use one of the existing mills which was used for regrinding for
additional primary grinding. This mill could be converted to a ball mill. The milling circuit would then
be open circuit rod milling feeding the cyclone feed sump. The cyclone would be in closed circuit with
the ball mill. This would result in a significant increase in the throughput of the milling circuit as well
as improving the milling efficiency as the ratio of reduction in the rod mill would be reduced and the
sizing by the cyclone would be done on a coarser product and hence reduce overgrinding.
The throughput of the flotation circuit could be increased by adding additional mechanical flotation
cells and increasing volume of the cleaner cells.
The new filter is capable of handling an increased throughput, however the dryer is limited to
approximately 2.8 t/h. The throughput of the dryer could be increased only if the moisture content of
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 163
the feed was reduced which test work indicates is not possible by filtering or using a centrifuge.
Therefore an additional dryer would be required.
The maximum capacity of the screens is not known, however, a fourth screen could easily be
installed.
The maximum capacity of the bagging plant is not known, however, it should be possible to improve
the throughout by rationalising the conveying system or installing an additional bagging system.
GBM has estimated the running time be a conservative 85 %. There is potential to improve on this by
improving maintenance and replacing older equipment with more reliable new units.
17.4.4 GRAPHITE RECOVERY AND GRADE
The graphite recovery is based on the results of the test work by Aminpro and its flotation model.
Table 17-17: Screen Analysis of Concentrates of the Locked Cycle Test
# µm Rougher cleaner
Rougher scavenger concentrate
Combined
% Ret % C % Ret % C % Ret % C
60 +250 13.9 95 22.0 95 18.4 95
80 +180 -250 18.8 97 23.4 92 21.4 94
140 +100 -180 26.5 94 29.6 91 28.3 92
-140 -100 40.8 89 25.0 87 31.9 88
100.0 92 100.0 91
Wt distribution 5.29 6.86 12.15
By comparing the above metallurgical results to a selection of production reports from historical
operations, further validation can be made of the achievable recoveries and grades of the various
products.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 164
Table 17-18: Summary of Available Production Reports Year 2000
Month 2000
Head grade % of total graphite production Grade % C
% C +160 µm +80 µm
-80 um +160 µm +80 µm
-80 um -160 um -160 um
January 11.1 26.2 34.9 38.9 91.7 92 90.1
February 9.9 23.8 35.3 41.3 92.1 92.7 91.2
March 8.9 24.1 35.0 40.8 91.6 91.8 89.1
April 6.5 22.6 34.4 42.9 92.0 92.3 88.3
August 12.1 32.2 31.6 36.2 93.9 93.3 88.8
September 12.1 36.9 30.7 32.4 94.1 93.9 91.3
October 9.4 34.9 31.0 34.0 94.3 94.1 89.5
November 8.9 32.2 28.6 39.2 94.3 93.8 84.8
December 12.1 41.1 29.6 29.3 93.6 92.2 84.5
The following tables describe some product specifications used by the plant. These have been
considered by GBM and Woxna in support of the pricing assumptions.
Table 17-19: Coarse Flake Production Specification
Coarse Flake Production Specification
Grade No 160/92 Coarse
Type Natural Flake
Size Specification Min 80 % >150 micron (+100 mesh)
Carbon Specification 92 % Minimum
Moisture Max. 0.5 % H2O
Bulk Density 550 kg/m³
Typical Product Analysis Carbon 94 % C
Ash 6 %
Sulphur 0.14 % S
Moisture 0.15 % H2O
Typical Ash Analysis SiO2 46.60 %
Al2O3 25.20 %
CaO 0.29 %
Fe2O3 14.10 %
K2O 6.40 %
MgO 5.20 %
MnO2 0.08 %
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 165
Coarse Flake Production Specification
Na2O 0.25 %
P2O5 0.04 %
TiO2 0.61 %
LOI 0.20 %
S 0.02 %
Table 17-20: Medium Flake Production Specification
Medium Flake Production Specification
Grade No 80-160/92 Medium
Type Natural Flake
Size Specification Max 20 % >150 micron (100 mesh)
Max 20 % < 75 micron (200 mesh)
Carbon Specification 92 % Minimum
Moisture Max. 0.5 % H2O
Bulk Density 550 kg/m³
Typical Product Analysis Carbon 93 % C
Ash 7%
Sulphur 0.23 % S
Moisture 0.15 % H2O
Typical Ash Analysis SiO2 46.80 %
Al2O3 25.80 %
CaO 0.29 %
Fe2O3 13.80 %
K2O 6.50 %
MgO 5.10 %
MnO2 0.06 %
Na2O 0.31 %
P2O5 0.03 %
TiO2 0.62 %
LOI 0.20 %
S 0.02 %
Table 17-21: Fine Flake Production Specification
Fine Flake Production Specification
Grade No -80 -/85 Powder
Type Natural Flake
Size Specification Max 20 % > 75 micron (200 mesh)
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 166
Fine Flake Production Specification
Carbon Specification 85 % Minimum
Moisture Max. 0.5 % H2O
Bulk Density 420 kg/m³
Typical Product Analysis Carbon 85 to 90 % C
Ash 15%
Sulphur 1.1 % S
Moisture 0.35 % H2O
Typical Ash Analysis SiO2 45.70 %
Al2O3 21.50 %
CaO 2.20 %
Fe2O3 20.70 %
K2O 4.30 %
MgO 3.50 %
MnO2 0.09 %
Na2O 0.43 %
P2O5 0.10 %
TiO2 0.93 %
LOI 0.30 %
S 0.03 %
17.5 FURTHER BENEFICIATION
As part of the product development work, the former owners of the operation invested in a study (Lu
and Forsberg, 2001) to develop methods for the production of high-purity graphite utilising the fine
flake graphite. Production tests had shown that such a plant can increase the carbon content in the
end-product to over 99.5 % as compared to current carbon contents of 95 % maximum. Based upon
further technical studies (Boliden, 2002), a high purity plant concept was consequently developed to
fulfil the following criteria for the end products:
Reach a carbon content of 98 % - 99 % after chemical purification in one stage
Reach a carbon content of >99.5 % after chemical purification in two stages
Reduce particle size to 5 µm - 10 µm using extremely fine grinding and micronisation.
A feasibility study for a leaching plant for high-purity graphite was carried out (Boliden Contech, 2001)
and an environmental permit for such a process was granted by the local county in 2005, but has
subsequently expired.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 167
Additional metallurgical test work and marketing studies are required before applying for a new
permit.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 168
SECTION 18 PROJECT INFRASTRUCTURE
18.1 GENERAL
The mine site has a partially depleted existing open pit, tailings management facility, waste rock dump
areas, mine site roads, clarification ponds and a processing facility. Parts of the plant have been
abandoned and parts have been mothballed. The mobile network coverage is good and internet
connection is available.
Figure 18-1: Processing Plant the Woxna Project Area
Figure 18-2: Open Pit at the Woxna Project Area
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 169
18.1.1 OFFICE AND PERSONNEL FACILITIES
There is an office that is currently in use by the mine staff of approximately 200 m2. Several semi-
portable office sections have been installed expanding the office space to approximately 300 m2. The
condition of the office is fair, however with a longer term view a new office will be required, although
no allowance has been made for this in the PEA.
Potable water is currently brought in by water tanker to a small on site storage facility. This will
continue during operations due to the low cost and adequate service.
There is a small accommodation block of approximately 120 m2 adjacent to the administration
building. It has 4 rooms and a shared kitchen facility. It is currently utilised for short stays by visitors. It
is not envisaged that rotation staff will require this accommodation for shift purposes and it will remain
in service for intermittent use only.
The milling building has a recently refurbished bath-house to support the intended crew size.
18.1.2 ROADS
The mine shares the access, of approximately 9.5 km, from national Route 301 to the site gate. The
road is of unsealed laterite construction and during the periods of precipitation/snow and freeze/thaw,
requires consistent maintenance. The mine is in a cooperative with the local community that live along
the road and contribute to its upkeep. The financial liability is apportioned to the contribution to traffic,
and a suitable allowance has been made in the operating cost estimate to cover this.
Site roads for access and maintenance experience low levels of traffic and are of basic unsealed
laterite construction. Maintenance is performed on an as needs basis using mine and plant equipment
and contributes a negligible cost to operations.
Haul roads will be constructed and maintained by the mining contractor and included in their operating
cost.
18.1.3 WAREHOUSE, STORES AND MAINTENANCE
A warehouse/stores facility of approximately 950 m2 is located adjacent to the plant. This area will be
sufficient for process plant spares and graphite product storage. This building is enclosed and
lockable, though not heated.
Due to the manning structure, most maintenance will be performed either in-situ or in a contractors’
facility in the nearby town, and therefore, a large dedicated maintenance area with cranage is not
required on site. There is some space adjacent to the gravity equipment that has been used for small
maintenance projects. This area should remain the location of these works, as well as tool storage, as
this area is part of the heated building.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 170
The mining contractor will provide and operate their own maintenance facilities.
18.1.4 LABORATORY
A prefabricated laboratory building will be installed adjacent to the process plant building so as to be
free from contamination of dust and vibration from the plant. The lab will be prefabricated and capable
of processing approximately 10 mining samples, 16 plant samples and 50 product samples per day
for size analysis, carbon content, sulphur content and moisture content.
As part of the laboratory supply, safety equipment, training, operations manuals and procedures will
be included.
18.1.5 FUEL
Current diesel storage on site is within a containerised facility. This will be positioned adjacent to the
building within the bunded area that was used for fuel and oil storage previously.
The mining contactor will provide and operate its own diesel storage facility.
18.1.6 VEHICLES
The plant operations require only simple mobile equipment to sustain steady operations. A loader will
be leased to feed ore from the stockpile to the crushing plant at an approximate utilisation of 30 %.
During other times, it will be performing road maintenance and with the use of a jib arm, act as
cranage for the plant.
A forklift already owned by the operation will be in use in the bagging plant and stores area.
The operation also owns a small ‘JLG’ elevated work platform for maintenance around the plant.
As the plant is compact and crew numbers small, only one light vehicle is required to move about the
site for periodic visits to the tailings management facility and clarification pond.
Any further equipment required by the plant will be hired for specific tasks on an hourly basis. Access
to this equipment is good from the nearby towns.
18.1.7 FENCING AND SECURITY
Allowance has been made to install a 2 m chain wire fence around the entire site. It is estimated that
this fence will be approximately 5.5 km in length.
18.2 ELECTRICAL
The existing power supply to the project site is from the national grid. The capacity of this connection
is limited to 4 000 KVA. No allowance has been included for upgrades to the network other than
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 171
connection to the new transformer and relocation of a section of the existing network to allow for the
proposed mine pit advancement.
The power supply to the plant shall supply power to the existing process loads as well as the new
loads required as part of the plant restart project.
A summary of the process plant power demands are listed in Table 21-12. The maximum demand
includes an allowance to ensure that there is sufficient capacity to start the largest motor on site while
all other equipment is under normal operating conditions. However, sequence starting could be used
to ensure the maximum demand does not exceed the average operating load.
New electrical equipment, inclusive of plant PLC/SCADA system, transformer, mill motors and drives
and cabling is required in order to re-start plant operations.
Existing electrical equipment must be tested, refurbished if required and re-commissioned in order to
re-start plant operations.
A limited number of new control loops, as required by GBM process control philosophy shall be
implemented.
18.2.1 POWER DISTRIBUTION
There are currently two 1 000 kVA transformers installed in a Transformer / MV switchgear / LV
switchgear building located close to the plant.
The transformers of different vector groups (T1 = Dy 0; T2 = Dy 11) and can therefore not be
connected to the bus in parallel. Attempts to do this in the past have resulted in the bus feeder
breakers tripping.
The transformer rooms are undersized and have inadequate ventilation or air filtration. Part of the
transformer building is a common MV (12 kV) and LV (400 V) room.
A new MV 1 900 kVA substation to be installed and supplied in a kiosk type enclosure, including MV
switchgear with spare feeder to allow for future expansion. This would remove the need for the MV
switchgear in the existing location thus separating the LV and MV switchgear.
Power will be distributed throughout the process plant on existing and new circuits from the plant main
LV switchgear assembly, which will remain in the existing substation building. Reticulation throughout
the plant will be via radial circuits at 400 V.
There is an additional electrical room inside the plant building and opposite the MV/LV building which
houses two PFC (Power Factor Correction) panels. This is assumed to be sufficient for the new and
existing loads and no allowance has been made for additional PFC. Allowance is made for tested and
refurbishment.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 172
18.2.2 MCCS AND MOTORS
From breakers in the existing LV distribution room a number of existing starter panels (approx. 20) are
fed throughout the plant building. These panels shall be tested and refurbished where required prior
to re-commissioning.
A new MCC room will be installed to house the motor starters for the new process loads.
Variable speed drives (VSDs) where required will be supplied as part of the MCC package.
The mill motors and drives are to be replaced. A variable speed drive has also been included for the
Rod Mill.
Basic motor tests on all other existing plant motors will be required prior to re-commissioning.
At present, the motors can only be started from the PLC/SCADA. There are no field start or field
emergency stops installed at the motors. However, every motor has a local isolator. Some local
isolators are located in positions which are not easily or safely accessible. The only way a motor can
be stopped in the field is by activating the local isolator. The motor starter circuit must be modified for
emergency stops and start-up warnings (where required). Installation of an emergency stop near each
motor and associated cabling is required as a minimum however, local control stations are allowed for
to facilitate plant operation by a small crew.
18.2.3 CABLE SIZING AND SELECTION
All new cables will be sized and selected according to Swedish or equivalent international standards.
All new power and control cables will be steel wire armour cables for mechanical protection.
18.2.4 EMERGENCY POWER
No allowance has been made for emergency power.
18.2.5 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
The plant motors are all started and stopped from the PLC/SCADA system. Currently there are no
field start or stop push-buttons in the plant. Therefore, the PLC is an important requirement in order to
operate the plant. The PLC/SCADA was apparently damaged by lightning some years ago and is not
functioning at present.
The model of Mitsubishi PLC which is currently installed in the plant is regarded as outdated ‘legacy’
equipment. It will be replaced with an up to date Mitsubishi PLC. This would have the advantage of
being able to re-use the original software (program).
The flotation columns level control loops are using outdated instrumentation (Fisher Bailey Porter).
These are to be replaced with ABB Instrumentation
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 173
The existing instruments have no tag numbers or service descriptions attached. These shall be
replaced during testing re-commissioning.
The mills, or other rotating or moving equipment, do not seem to have start-up warnings
(audio/visual). These shall be added to improve the safety of the plant.
18.2.6 VENDOR PACKAGES
The proposed crushing plant package will be vendor supplied with on-board electrical switchgear,
motor starters and controls. A spare LV feeder breaker in the LV distribution panel will be utilised to
supply this package
The pressure filter will have its own control supplied as a vendor package. This will be for the control
of all functions of the filter as well as quoted accessories and process control functions.
There is a drying plant with a Triplex dryer which is supplied by ‘Gebrüder Pfeiffer AG Kaiserslautern’
as well as a packing plant. Both plants are ‘vendor packages’. The local control panels of these
‘vendor packages’ are supplied (fed) from the LV room.
The packing plant is controlled from a local control room which contains an electrical control desk as
well as a relay logic panel and mimic. The graphite packing plant local control panel is to be upgraded
to PLC control.
18.3 TAILINGS MANAGEMENT FACILITY (TMF)
Tailings Management Facility evaluation and design has been undertaken by Tailings Consultants
Scandinavia AB (TCS) who were contracted directly by Woxna.
Woxna mine has an existing TMF, which was constructed during the previous operation of the mine
(operation shut down in 2001). The TMF consists of a tailings beach and a downstream area where
the water collects. Tailings were deposited from the south abutment of the east dam, causing the
tailings to slope towards the west dam.
The future production has been estimated to generate a total of 1.7 Mt of tailings. With an estimated
dry density of 1.5 t/m3 – based on samples from the existing tailings – a total of about 1.0 M m3 is
expected to be stored in the TMF. A conceptual tailings design has been completed to contain
1.5 M m3
Tailings will be pumped from the process plant and deposited in the TMF using spigots. Deposition
will occur from the East and West dams, as well as along the south boundary. Deposition will occur
from the east dam, forcing the water pool to gather in the west part of the tailings impoundment. A
spillway is constructed at the north-west boundary for discharge of water to the clarification pond.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 174
Figure 18-3: Tailings and Water Management at Woxna
The current dam embankments are in poor condition, and will be restored according to Swedish
guidelines (GruvRIDAS) prior to the reopening of the mine.
18.3.1 OPTIONS
In addition to an upstream dam, which is the selected option and is described below, there are a
range of other designs that may be suitable – most notably to a downstream dam. At present, a
downstream dam this is not considered possible due to the higher cost. However, if it is possible to
use waste-rock as construction material (non acid generating) as well as material from the stripping of
the ore, this type of design would be viable and also a way of using waste-rock instead of putting it on
a waste-rock dump. There are also possibilities of using thickened tailings disposal which could mean
that more tailings can be stored in the area. However this needs to be further investigated since this
could affect the plant water balance and the discharge.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 175
A third option is to use dry-stacked tailings in the facility to reduce costs further, as the use of dry-
stacked tailings would reduce the need for dam walls This is considered the most risky operation and
not normally suited to the local climate. The operation is however comparatively small and under
certain conditions; variations of the above options might present a possible alternative.
18.3.2 PROPOSED DAM STRUCTURE
Initially the dams will be reinforced and tailings deposited to fill up the existing free volume. The dams
will then be raised as upstream dams with a 1V:6H slope downstream, which provides long term
stability and requires less filter materials (a low hydraulic gradient minimizes the risk for internal
erosion). Horizontal filters will be placed on top of the existing dam crests and will function as drains in
the upstream construction. The dams will be raised at regular intervals during the life of the mine to
accommodate the deposited tailings. The highest crest level of the dams will be +283.5 m.
Figure 18-4 shows the conceptual design of the upstream dams. The freeboard to the tailings is 0.5
m, and a beach of at least 50 m is recommended.
Figure 18-4: Upstream Tailings Dam
18.3.3 SPILLWAY
The choice of spillway for emergency discharge will require more detailed studies. Three options are
available:
a) spillway in the northern part of the TMF, with a channel leading the water around the higher
ground north of the western dam. This design will not be suitable in an early stage but may be
a good option after raising the dams. (In the initial phase this solution will require a very deep
channel)
b) Sloping the TMF to accumulate the free water in the area of the northern part of the western
dam, where a spillway may be installed. To allow for deposition of tailings close to the area of
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 176
free water a diversion berm is constructed from the western dam eastwards into the
impoundment. This design may be suitable at all stages of the TMF. Regarding costs, this
option will require a diversion berm and an impervious dam in the northern part of the TMF.
These will both become more and more costly for each raise of the TMF.
c) A central intake tower with a culvert leading through the dam wall. This may be suitable at all
stages of the TMF. The required discharge capacity is fairly low since the TMF has a rather
small area. The use of a culvert through the dam wall is not a common solution in Sweden,
and regulatory authorities may object.
Whist the final design has not been decided, an allowance in the cost estimate has been made based
on what would be considered the median cost of the range of solutions.
18.3.4 PHASED TMF EXPANSION
Due to the high capital cost, the expansion of the TMF will be done progressively. The design concept
and costs included in the LOM CAPEX are representative of this approach.
18.4 CLARIFICATION POND (LAKE UXATJÄRN)
The use of the small Lake Uxatjärn, located close to the TMF, as a clarification pond for the mine will
continue.
There is a small dam wall for the lake and it is in need of some remediation work as well as expansion
to provide greater operational flexibility, though it is acceptable in the short term to continue its use in
its current state.
A works program is proposed to coincide with Stage 2 of the TMF construction. The dam
embankment will be restored and raised, and the spillway will be redesigned to accommodate
appropriate design floods. The dam embankment is constructed similar to the dams of the TMF, i.e.
with a 1V:2H upstream slope and a 1V:3H downstream slope. The crest of the dam embankment will
be +236 m. The final proposed configuration is shown in Figure 18-5.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 177
Figure 18-5: Clarification Pond Expansion
Water from the clarification pond will be recycled into the plant. If excess water is required to be
discharged, it will undergo conditioning (Figure 18-6) before being released to the river Älman.
Figure 18-6: Water Conditioning Plant
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 178
18.5 EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS
According to Swedish legislation an Emergency Preparedness Plan (EPP) must be filed before start-
up, and dams need to be monitored. Every site is compelled to have an up-to-date Operation,
Maintenance and Surveillance (OMS) manual, which includes information about the TMF as well as
the dam safety organisation
18.6 WATER MANAGEMENT
A water balance has been completed for the site that indicates that under normal circumstances no
additional water will be required (annual net positive water balance). A small amount of raw (fresh)
water is required for the process, for example, gland service, and as such, the cost of installing
equipment to replenish water from the river Älman is included. Water will be pumped from the river
Älman or from one of two boreholes, approximately 1 000 m via Lake Uxatjärn at a rate of 45 m3/h. It
is proposed that the pipe is laid on the ground adjacent to an access road and covered with a thick
layer of woodchips to protect from freezing. This option attracts a much lower capital cost to buried
pipework via the most direct route (550 m) and is in use in other parts of the site with success over
the winter months.
Woxna is already permitted to draw 45 m3/h from the downstream river Älman. No hydrogeology has
been completed to support that option and more boreholes may be required. Study work to verify this
should be conducted in the next stage of project development.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 179
SECTION 19 MARKET STUDIES AND CONTRACTS
19.1 INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this section is to outline current trends and potential within the international natural
graphite market. Particular attention is paid to the supply and demand trends pertaining to flake
graphite of varying size and purity within Europe which is expected to be the principal market for
Woxna graphite. The market outline provided here forms the supporting basis for defining the graphite
prices that are used in a financial evaluation of the Woxna project. Graphite prices in Europe are
usually negotiated between consumers and suppliers on a spot basis reflecting the supply and
demand situation for the particular graphite purity and flake size at the time, however, longer term
contracts, up to a year, can be agreed.
A literature review was completed of the research report Natural & Synthetic Graphite: Global Industry
Markets and Outlook, by Roskill Information Services Ltd (2) to aid in the preparation of this section.
GBM also relied heavily on members of the Flinders management team who have been monitoring
the graphite market and meeting with potential off takers for a number of years.
19.2 MARKET DESCRIPTION
Graphite can be produced from either the natural mineral or through a synthetic process. The global
market for synthetic and natural graphite was estimated to consume 2.4 M tonnes in 2011, worth
USD 9 billion.
Breaking this down, synthetic graphite electrodes is the largest segment by value at USD 4 billion
followed by synthetic graphite blocks and other synthetic products. Natural and synthetic powder,
including flake, are estimated to be worth USD 1.1 billion annually.
Since 2010 the graphite market has attracted increased interest due to rising prices stemming from
growing graphite demand and potential threats to graphite supply. Prior to this the market was
relatively static, as Chinese domination of graphite production allowed China to dictate prices.
Demand has grown steadily in traditional markets, such as refractories, lubricants, friction products
and even pencils while strong growth has occurred in new markets, such as those for expandable
graphite products and lithium-ion battery anodes. Until very recently there has been a lack of
investment in graphite mining ventures outside of China.
Natural (flake, amorphous and lump types) and synthetic graphite can and are used in many of the
same applications. The choice of material is largely determined by their individual properties and/or
their price. Some forms of natural graphite however, particularly flake, have superior performance in
some uses such as refractories and there is little substitution. New technologies, applications and
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 180
speciality products are increasing demand for higher specification graphite products. Over the past
few years demand has tended to migrate from synthetic and amorphous graphite to natural flake
graphite due to improved natural graphite products as well as competitive prices.
19.3 NATURAL GRAPHITE DEMAND
Annual demand for natural graphite is estimated at 930 000 t with flake graphite demand (540 000 t)
exceeding amorphous. Refractories, used to line furnaces, are the largest segment for natural
graphite comprising more than 50 % of demand or 485 000 t. Foundries, lubricants, batteries and
friction products then follow in terms of market volume.
Asia has been the largest and fastest growing consumer of natural flake graphite for the last decade,
due in a large part to the rapid economic development of China. Asia accounts for 64 % of global
flake demand. Europe at 85 000 t/a is the second largest market (16 %) globally.
Roskill forecasts that demand for total natural graphite will grow at an average of 3.3 % per annum to
reach 1.1 Mt by 2016 while demand for flake graphite is forecast to grow at an average of 4.3 % per
annum to 2016.
The refractory market is forecast to grow at 3 % per annum driven by increased steel demand in
China. Natural and synthetic flake graphite are also used for anodes in the rapidly growing market for
lithium-ion batteries. This segment is projected to grow at 10 % to 12 % to 2016.
19.4 NATURAL GRAPHITE SUPPLY
China currently dominates world production of natural graphite, accounting for 70 % of supply in 2011.
However, this was as high as 80 % three to four years ago. This reduction is due to the closure of
Chinese amorphous graphite mines in Hunan. China produces both flake and amorphous graphite but
is more abundant in amorphous graphite deposits.
A change in export policy by China in 2011 led to the replacement of export rebates on graphite with
the imposition of taxes and export permits temporarily slowing down in graphite exports and resulting
in a spike in graphite prices.
Flake graphite is also produced in Brazil, India and Canada while Mexico produces amorphous
graphite. Apart from one medium sized graphite mine in Norway, Europe is heavily reliant on imports
to meet its graphite needs.
In the short term Roskill predicts that natural graphite supply is likely to increase as new projects
come on-stream and Chinese amorphous production recovers. It is likely during this time that supply
for flake graphite will meet any growth in demand.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 181
Roskill forecasts that supply will rise by 3 % per annum to 2016, resulting in a supply of natural
graphite of 1.1 Mt. Many existing mines are being exhausted, or costs are rising as they get deeper,
but higher graphite prices since 2011 has encouraged investment in new graphite projects, of which
there were over 70 by mid-2012. Although most of these new ventures are in the early exploration
stage, it is expected that new mines will be responsible for at least 200 000 t of the increased flake
capacity supply by 2016.
In the long term flake graphite demand could potentially exceed supply if production of lithium-ion
battery anodes ramps up to meet an acceleration in sales of hybrid and electric vehicles and because
of the long time it takes to develop new graphite mines. Demand will likely shift towards larger flake,
higher grade graphite, for use in expandable graphite products.
Historically amorphous and flake graphite have accounted for 60 % and 40 % of natural graphite
production respectively. This ratio has altered to around 55 % to 60 % flake graphite and 40 % to
45 % amorphous graphite since 2011, largely due to the closure of Chinese amorphous graphite
mines.
19.5 NATURAL GRAPHITE MARKET PRICE TRENDS
Historically graphite prices were stable, maintained by abundant supply from China and typically at
levels too low to attract new investment in mines outside China. In recent years, however, China’s
prices have risen due to increasing operating costs, governmental policy that increase export taxes
and tariffs, higher domestic demand and diversification of Chinese producers into higher grade
materials.
Graphite prices have fluctuated since 2010, initially with a sharp rise as the market reacted to
increasing global consumption, closure of amorphous mines in China and imposition of Chinese
government taxes. In 2012 prices began to retreat due to buyer resistance to the rapid rise in graphite
prices as well as recession in Europe and the USA and lower than expected growth in China.
Figure 19-1 illustrates the average price of natural graphite by type from 2003 to 2012.
It is expected that prices will bottom out in 2013 and then start to recover in line with economic
activity. Rising costs of production, such as those for labour, meeting environmental regulations and
mining overheads, in conjunction with more accessible reserves being exhausted, are contributing to
pushing prices upwards.
Natural flake graphites command a price premium over amorphous graphites, with price being directly
related to flake size and carbon content. Figure 19-2 illustrates the average market price of medium
size flake graphite by carbon content from 2003 to 2012. Roskill expects that flake graphite prices will
remain higher than those of amorphous graphite. As more new flake graphite mining projects come
on-stream it is expected that the upward pressure on graphite prices will relax somewhat.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 182
Figure 19-1: European Average Price of Natural Graphite by Type from 2003 to 2012 (USD/t) - (2)
Figure 19-2: European Average Price of Medium Size Flake Graphite by Grade from 2003 to 2012 (USD/t) - (2)
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 183
19.6 PRICING BASIS FOR THE WOXNA GRAPHITE RESTART PROJECT
The pricing for the project is based on current and forecast prices for relevant grades as compiled by
industry intelligence analyst Industrial Minerals (IM). Graphite prices are not determined on a
publically traded market but instead determined privately between buyers and sellers. IM tracks
industrial minerals prices (including graphite) through regular contact with producers, traders and
purchasers and publishes graphite prices that are generally recognised by the graphite industry to be
the best reflection of current market conditions.
It has been common practice to use a 24 month trailing average graphite price in graphite PEAs. The
Woxna PEA utilized a 12 month trailing average graphite price so as to exclude the peak price period
occurring in 2011/12.
19.7 PRODUCTION OF SALEABLE GRAPHITE
Applying Woxna’s planned product distribution to IM’s 12 month trailing average graphite prices
produces an average selling price of 1 199 USD/t for the Woxna PEA. This selling price is considered
to be conservative when compared to the 24 month trailing average graphite price of 1 548 USD/t or
prices used in other graphite project PEAs.
Table 19-1: Average Sale Price Estimation
Size (µm) Purity Proportion of Production
1 Year Trailing Average (USD/t)
Annual Quantity (t)
+ 250 95 % 18 % 1 824 2 990
+ 180, - 250 94 % 22 % 1 526 3 650
+ 100, - 180 92 % 28 % 1 009 4 650
- 100 88 % 32 % 787 5 310
Average / Total 1 199 16 600
The production reports of a comparatively small volume of product from historical operations validate
the metallurgical, recovery and saleability findings.
The demand for graphite has weakened during 2013 as a result of reduced demand and slower
economic growth in China, but many analysts believe that the prices have bottomed out and that the
market will see a positive trend from now and throughout 2013/14. Demand for flake graphite
continues to grow led by refractories. Higher growth levels are expected in the battery sector. There
will be a continued shift away from amorphous graphite as emerging applications typically require
large flake and/or high-purity grades. If lower prices continue, companies developing new graphite
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 184
projects will face competition for a shrinking pool of investment opportunities. This could be an
advantage for advanced projects as Woxna Graphite, which company will be able to produce and sell
graphite in the middle of 2014.
China will continue to lead the way for international trade and pricing in graphite, as it has done for
many years. In the long term, Chinese export prices are expected to rise because of the increasing
cost of domestic production (as labour, environmental and overhead costs rise) and because of
increasing Chinese control through consolidation.
Meanwhile, the quantity of graphite available for export will decrease as China ramps-up production
and export of value added products. These factors will gradually push consumers in the rest of the
world to look for alternative sources of raw material elsewhere, which is an advantage for Woxna
graphite.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 185
SECTION 20 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES, PERMITTING, AND SOCIAL
OR COMMUNITY IMPACT
20.1 ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITTING REQUIREMENTS AND STATUS
The Swedish Environmental Code is a combined code which contains general requirements for the
environment, land and water use, environmental impact assessments and the code also enables
European Directives e.g. the water frame work directive to be incorporated into Swedish law. The
code also regulates areas of national interest including Natura 2000 areas, reindeer herding and
mineral deposits. The ESIA chapter in the code summarizes the legal requirements for an EISA. More
information can be found in sub-decrees from different authorities. The Swedish legislation requires
the applicant to undertake an environmental (and social) assessment (in Swedish “MKB”) at two
different stages during the development of a mining project.
The first MKB is produced when applying for an exploitation concession in accordance with the
Minerals Act (SFS 1194:45) from the Mining Inspectorate of Sweden (“Bergsstaten”). Although the
exploitation concession follows the Minerals Act, a MKB must be performed according to the
requirements of the Swedish Environmental Code (1998:808). The produced MKB, however, is to
some extent simplified, e.g. no alternatives are needed to be presented or explored. The emphasis of
the MKB is only to demonstrate that there are no obvious conflicts and that mining operation is
possible with a minimum of impact on the surrounding land uses. The assessment is based on early
project design information (“PEA” information). When granted, the company gets the sole right to the
deposit for 25 years which at the end of the period may be extended further. Stakeholders also have
the right to appeal to a higher court. Stakeholder consultation is in general not required, but is
recommended, and the County Administrative Board as well as the local municipalities (local
environmental authorities) will provide comment on the MKB. Approval of the exploitation concession
is required prior to submitting an application for an environmental permit to mine (“extraction permit”)
to the Land and Environmental Court (In Swedish “Mark och miljödomstol”).
The environmental permit application, under the terms of the Environment Code (SFS 1998:808), also
requires an MKB, but an extended one, which is based on a more defined (definite) project
description (“PFS” or “FS” level) than the MKB prepared for the exploitation concession application.
Several alternative ways of mining, TMF designs and locations etc. must also be evaluated and
described as well as transportation and processing options, noise and vibration etc. The
environmental permit application must also be followed by a technical description, which describes
the future operations in detail. Again, the application is evaluated by the Swedish Land and
Environmental Court with input from various regulatory authorities, the County Administrative Board,
Municipalities, Swedish EPA etc. Stakeholder consultation is required during the application process.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 186
Once granted, mining operations can be started. Stakeholders also have the right to appeal the permit
to a higher court.
Flinders Resources Ltd already has existing and valid exploitation and environmental permits for the
mine and the central deposit since the mine has been in operation. According to the Swedish
legislation the mine is still in operation, although the company has not actively been mining since
2001. All the documentation (Environmental Impact Assessment (“EIA”) etc.) is in Swedish and mostly
originates from the permitting process in 1992 (Kringelgruvan).
The company also had valid and existing exploitation permits for the surrounding deposits (Mattsmyra
and Gropabo). Since those deposits have not been mined, the environmental permits expired in April
2012 (the permits had a life-time of 7 years before mining had to commence).
All existing mining leases and extraction permits are presented in Table 20-1.
Table 20-1: Woxna Graphite Project Tenure
Property
Type of Area Extraction permit Valid Until
Conditions Mineral Tenure (Ha)
(Environmental permit)
(date)
Kringelgruvan Mining Licence
30.76 Permits received and still valid 1992-09-17
and 1992-10-27 31/12/2016
Environmental permit in hand for 100 kt annual production.
nr 1 with exploration
licence 4, 5, 6 & 7
(Exploitation concession)
Mining has depleted 300kt from historical resource.
Gropabo Mining Licence 18.2
Permit received 2005-03-21
21/02/2025 ***
(Exploitation concession)
Expired 2012-04-18
Mattsmyra Mining Licence 72.97
Permit received 2005-03-21
21/02/2025 ***
(Exploitation concession)
Expired 2012-04-18
Månsberg Mining Licence
24.77 No application filed 27/12/2024 (Exploitation concession)
* Is automatically extended 10 years when a mine is in operation
** The central deposit incl. mine, mill, tailings impoundment, clarification pond and the rest of the facilities.
*** Surrounding deposit (no mine).
20.2 FURTHER PERMITS
Changes to the stipulations in the present permit (from 1992) as needed for an expansion, requires
the authorities to issue a new/updated permit. Under the scenario presented in this report, in order to
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 187
process more than 100 000 t/a feed in any given calendar year (i.e. to reach the nameplate tonnage
of 155 000 t/a), Woxna will need to apply for a new permit. This permit will include consideration for
the whole operation including mining, processing, power, water management, tailings and waste
management.
The environmental permit application, under the terms of the Environment Code (SFS 1998:808),
requires an EIA and a technical description which describes the future operation in detail. The
application is evaluated by the Swedish Land and Environmental Court with input from various
regulatory authorities most importantly the County Administrative Board. Stakeholder consultation is
required during the application process and the company have already had meetings with the local
community (residents), the municipality as well as the County Administrative Board. However the
permitting process has not formally started.
In order to prepare the EIA, baseline data is needed as well as technical data. The company is in a
good position with water baseline data from 1997 to the present day. During 2012 the company also
performed both a nature inventory report as well as a study of the recipient (fish, fauna, sediments).
Since the mine is an existing one it is not expected that the company needs to do more studies than
noise and vibration in order to comply with what the authorities expect, and it should not take more
than 12 months to 18 months before a new permit will be granted. It is also expected that the
permitting process should be straight-forward. There are no obvious conflicts in the area, since the
activity at the mine mean it is technically already in operation. If the permit application is filed
early 2014, a new permit should be in effect by late 2015.
Owing to the construction and ramp-up period, it is not expected that cumulative plant throughput
exceeding permitted tonnages will be achieved until late in the 2015 calendar year. If circumstances
lead to delayed permit approval, short term permits can be granted to cover the balance of an
operating year, thus delaying the requirement for a permit until mid to late 2016.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 188
SECTION 21 CAPITAL AND OPERATING COSTS
This section serves to provide information pertaining to the preparation of the capital cost estimate
(CAPEX) and operating cost estimate (OPEX). This includes the assumptions, exclusions, methods
and data sources for the various aspects of the cost engineering exercise.
21.1 BASIS OF ESTIMATE
The CAPEX and OPEX have been estimated based on the following project specifications,
determined through the ore resource study and testwork.
Table 21-1: Operating Inputs
Description Units Phase 1
Crushing Plant Design Dry Tonnage t/h 70
Process Plant Design Dry Tonnage t/h 20.8
Crushing Plant Availability Max - 75 %
Process Plant Availability - 85 %
The level of engineering detail and confidence has a direct effect on the precision and accuracy of the
final estimate. To ensure the required level of confidence is achieved in the preparation of the cost
estimate, several engineering design inputs are required which form part of the overall basis. The cost
estimate for this project is based on an existing plant and infrastructure as well as preliminary
engineering on modifications and additions. The engineering documents which have been used to
develop the CAPEX and OPEX are listed in Table 21-2.
Table 21-2: Supporting Documents
Title Reference
Process Design Criteria (3)
Project Design Basis (4)
Mass and Water Balance (5)
Capital Expenditure (CAPEX) Cost Database (6)
CAPEX and OPEX for TMF (Golder/TCS) (7)
Operational Expenditure (OPEX) Cost Calculation (8)
Mechanical Equipment List (9)
Electrical Load List (10)
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 189
Title Reference
Production Schedule and Mining Costs (11)
Site layouts and GA Drawings -
21.1.1 PROJECT AREAS
The project has been divided up into project areas (detailed in Table 21-3), each with an area number
and brief description.
This structure forms the basis for the financial model, in which the capital cost is reported for each line
item.
Table 21-3: Project Area Breakdown
Area No. Area Name
000 General
100 Mine
200 Processing
300 Waste Disposal
400 Product Handling and Transport
500 Infrastructure and Utilities
21.1.2 METHODOLOGY
The cost estimate is based on the current level of engineering design and has been generated from
supporting engineering quantities and cost information. Cost information has been derived from the
following sources:
Preliminary evaluated tender for the crushing plant
Budget quotations for other plant equipment from suppliers on preliminary process data
Historical cost information sourced from in-house and commercial databases. (Infomine
(12))
Actual expenditures and budgeted figures for site refurbishment works
Data from current and historical operations
Factors for ancillary works have been applied to the Mechanical Equipment. Factors are
derived from the in-house database and from estimating publications (13).
This estimate has been prepared to an accuracy range of ± 30 %.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 190
21.1.3 ASSUMPTIONS
The following assumptions have been made during the preparation of this estimate:
New equipment will be purchased where equipment has to be replaced or additional
equipment is required
Existing equipment will be refurbished
Equipment costs are based on GBM selected suppliers that may not necessarily be the
final equipment supplier for the project
Equipment costs are based on information and testwork available at the time of design.
All required earthworks materials such as fill, sand, gravel, crushed rock, etc. can be
sourced within 2 km of the plant site
21.1.4 CURRENCY AND EXCHANGE RATES
Capital and operating cost estimates are prepared in mixed currencies and reported in United States
dollars (USD). The exchange rates used in calculations are shown in Table 21-4.
Table 21-4: Currency Exchange Rate
Currency Code Rate
United States dollar USD 1.0000
Swedish Krona SEK 6.5401
Canadian dollar CAD 0.9696
Euro EUR 0.7569
Pound sterling GBP 0.6512
Note: exchange rates are taken from http://www.xe.com as of 15 August 2013.
21.1.5 BASE DATE AND REPORTING CURRENCY
The cost estimate has a base date of the 3rd quarter of 2013. The estimate is reported in USD.
21.1.6 CAPEX INCLUSIONS
Mechanical equipment costs.
Some commodity quantities have been derived from basic design documentation.
The balance of the piping, platework, earthworks, civil, structural, control and
instrumentation, electrical, installation and freight forwarding have been calculated as
a factor of the mechanical equipment costs. These factors have taken into account
the nature of the existing operation. Specifics are described further below
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 191
Infrastructure including roads, security and fencing.
Any upgrades and modifications required to utilities including power supply, raw
water supply, potable water, compressed air, fuel depot and sewage treatment to
support the restarted operation.
Any upgrades and additions to buildings associated with the beneficiation plant such
as the laboratory, mill office, warehouse, workshop, emergency services building,
and administration office, as required to support the restarted operation.
EPCM as cost for the support of the delivery of the plant and infrastructure as per the
battery limits. However, it is intended that this level of assistance is as low as
practicable.
21.1.7 OPEX INCLUSIONS
Provision of water, fuel and electricity.
Manpower for the operation of the mine, process plant and associated infrastructure.
General administration costs.
Provision of appropriate operating spares.
Necessary maintenance costs (equipment, vehicles, roads, pipelines, etc.).
Lease of relevant mobile equipment for the operations of the beneficiation plant,
support services and personal use.
21.1.8 EXCLUSIONS
Costs incurred to date on site associated with the Woxna Graphite Restart Project,
including consultant and testwork fees.
Provision for demolition works or removal of existing infrastructure.
Allowance for cost escalation or for currency fluctuations.
Allowance for future scope changes.
Land acquisition.
Environmental studies and permitting.
Additional consultants.
Operational insurances.
Community relations and services.
Labour stand down costs.
Demurrage costs.
Any geotechnical work or test work.
Insurance costs.
Management reserve
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 192
21.1.9 RISKS AND OPPORTUNITIES
Several risks and opportunities have been identified in the preparation of this estimate as a result of
the estimating methods:
The use of database costs may introduce errors or omissions in failing to allow for
site specific requirements.
No allowances have been made for the event of a labour stand-down or other
significant interruptions to work.
As this is a PEA level study the level of engineering is only sufficient to estimate the
costs to within ± 30 %.
21.1.10 CONTINGENCY
Contingency is an amount added to an estimate to allow for items, conditions, or events for which the
state, occurrence, or effect is uncertain and that experience shows will likely result, in aggregate, in
additional costs.
It covers costs which may result from incomplete design, unforeseen and unpredictable conditions, or
uncertainties within the defined project scope. Contingency will usually include allowances for
planning and estimating errors and omissions, minor price fluctuations other than general escalation,
design developments and changes within the scope, and variations in market and environmental
conditions. The contingency estimate for the project is broken down into the risk drivers identified as
follows:
Project definition.
Estimating methods and estimating data.
Engineering design efforts.
Supplier quotations or database costs.
Site data and test work.
Contingency is estimated using a factored method which is suitable for a Class 4 cost estimate. As a
result of the estimating techniques employed, a 20 % contingency is to be used.
21.2 CAPITAL COST
The capital cost estimate is broken down into direct, indirect and working capital costs shown in
Table 21-5. The capital cost breakdown structure is reported on a project area basis using the
structure shown in Table 21-3.
The total initial capital investment for the start-up is USD 16.64 M, which includes contingency and the
cost of the first tailings expansion.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 193
Table 21-5: Initial Capital Cost (M USD)
Cost Centre Total 000
General 100
Mining 200
Process 300
Waste 400
Product 500
Infrast
Total Capital Investment 16.72 5.69 0.15 6.80 3.37 - 0.70
Fixed Capital 14.33 3.75 0.15 6.36 3.37 - 0.70
100 - Direct 10.28 0.31 - 6.36 2.91 - 0.70
101 - Earthwork & Civils 3.07 0.21 - 0.22 2.64 - -
102 - Structural 0.09 - - 0.09 - - -
103 - Buildings 0.16 - - - - - 0.16
104 - Mechanical Refurb 0.46 - - 0.46 - - 0.01
105 - Mechanical New 4.40 - - 3.83 0.09 - 0.48
106 - Mobile Equipment - - - - - - -
107 - Electrical 1.11 - - 1.11 - - -
108 – Control & Instrumentation 0.20 - - 0.20 - - -
109 - Piping 0.28 - - 0.04 0.18 - 0.05
110 - Platework 0.07 - - 0.07 - - -
111 - Mechanical Installation 0.35 - - 0.35 - - -
112 - Freight Forwarding 0.10 0.10 - - - - -
200 - Indirect 4.05 3.44 0.15 - 0.46 - -
201 - EPCM 1.06 1.06 - - - - -
202 - Owner's Costs 0.20 0.05 0.15 - - - -
203 - Consultants 1.34 0.88 - - 0.46 - -
204 - Field Indirect 0.07 0.07 - - - - -
205 - Insurance - - - - - - -
206 - Contingency 1.38 1.38 - - - - -
Working Capital 2.38 1.94 - 0.44 - - -
301 - Consumables 0.04 - - 0.04 - - -
302 - Initial & Commis Spares 0.40 - - 0.40 - - -
21.2.1 DIRECT COST DEVELOPMENT
The direct costs for the project include:
All labour required for Project construction and management activities.
All material and equipment required for construction and refurbishment
Mechanical, electrical, control, instrumentation, civil works, earthworks and piping
installation services.
Transport and freighting services.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 194
21.2.1.1 STRUCTURAL
An allowance has been made for a nominal tonnage of equipment based on the general arrangement
drawings provided. Costs for fabricated steelwork have been sourced from an estimating guide and
benchmarked against discussions with local fabricators.
21.2.1.2 BUILDINGS
Building cost is predominantly for a laboratory. Budget pricing has been received for the equipment,
with a rate for building construction from an estimating guide applied the area advised by the supplier.
21.2.1.3 ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION
Preliminary BOQ’s have been developed for the electrical and control infrastructure envisaged to
service new equipment as per the mechanical equipment list. Major costs are based budget
quotations from suppliers, and the balance on GBM database figures.
Allowance has been made for the refurbishment of relevant electrical equipment, with some input
from local service providers.
21.2.1.4 PLATEWORK
A draft platework BOQ has been prepared based on preliminary sizing of major tanks. A tonnage
based contingency has been allowed for miscellaneous platework items. Costs for platework are
based on database figures.
21.2.1.5 NEW EQUIPMENT - MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT COSTS
The Mechanical Engineering Costs have been sourced using budget quotations for major equipment.
Commercial databases and in-house historical data have been used for the balance of plant
estimating.
21.2.1.6 FREIGHT FORWARDING
An allowance of USD 100 000 for freight forwarding has been included in the estimate, which is
equivalent to approximately 50 trucks from continental Europe.
21.2.1.7 BALANCE OF PLANT COST ESTIMATES
For the balance of the plant, costs have been estimated using both quantity estimates and factors of
Mechanical Equipment costs. These cost centres and their associated factors are listed in Table 21-6.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 195
The factors are sourced from estimating resource (13) with modifications based on comparison with in
house database estimates for which more detailed level costing exercises have been conducted, site
construction techniques and most importantly consideration for the existing infrastructure on site.
Table 21-6: Direct Cost Centre Factors
Cost Centre Factor Comments
Earthwork 2 % Most equipment inside existing building
Civil 3 % Most equipment inside existing building
Initial and Commissioning Spares 9 % Considers locality of service providers (Metso etc)
Mechanical Installation 8 %
These factors have been modified to consider the extent of the existing infrastructure.
21.2.1.8 EXISTING EQUIPMENT – REFURBISHMENT COST
Refurbishment costs have been developed on an equipment level basis and mostly are derived from
an allowance methodology. Local labour rates, known cost of spares and expert experience have
been considered as part of this approach.
21.2.1.9 TAILINGS MANAGEMENT FACILITY COST ESTIMATION
Tailings Management Facility evaluation, design and costing has been undertaken by Tailings
Consultants Scandinavia AB (TCS).
The cost (CAPEX and OPEX) for works related to the TMF and the clarification pond has been
estimated using the following method:
The required available capacity of water in the clarification pond has been estimated to
approximately 120 000 m3.
The required storage capacity in the TMF has been estimated to 2.3 Mt, however only the
phases to contain 1.6 Mt are included.
Volume of tailings has been calculated based on the dry density of tailings samples taken
of the deposited tailings.
Dams and their required heights have been modelled using an assumed slope of the
tailings beach (based on references from similar sites in Sweden). To compensate for
variations in deposition, a concave beach profile, uncertainties in beach slope and
uncertainties in dry densities the required volume has been increased by 20 % as a safety
margin.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 196
A preliminary dam design, following Swedish guidelines, has been used to estimate the
required volume of fill materials.
The characteristics of the tailings regarding the upstream construction have not been
considered at this stage, i.e. the grain size distribution and the acidic properties of the sand.
Cost for dams have been calculated using reference values of cost for fill materials from
other TMF projects in Sweden.
To compensate for uncertainties in material cost and material volumes (the later related to
unknown conditions regarding excavation depth to reach till of acceptable quality – here
assumed to be 1 meter) calculated costs are increased by 20 %.
Additional infrastructure has been calculated as follows:
Spillways and channels: Estimated cost for either spillway solution.
Pipes and pumps (slurry deposition): A preliminary design of pipelines and
pumps is available, but for a lower yearly tonnage (reference costs taken from
suppliers.) The cost of slurry deposition in the final stage of production has
been based on these references. An overall upgrade of the deposition system
once in the lifetime of the mine has been included. Pumps are not included.
Dam safety monitoring: Estimation based on preliminary design.
Operating costs are mainly based on estimated cost for electricity and required
operators.
Contingency has been included in the quantities and therefore no overriding contingency is applied to
Tailings costs.
21.2.1.10 MINING CAPITAL COST ESTIMATES
Golder did not undertake an estimate of the mine capital cost estimates assuming that the existing
infrastructure was adequate to execute the mine plan. The contractor supplied mobile and fixed plant
were addressed through the mine operating cost estimates.
21.2.2 INDIRECT COST DEVELOPMENT
Definitions of the project indirect costs are given below in Table 21-7.
Table 21-7: Indirect Cost Centre Definitions
Indirect Cost Centre
Definition
EPCM Costs for engineering, procurement activities, construction management, project management, site mobilisation, site establishment and services during construction.
Contingency A cost element of the estimate which covers the uncertainty and variability associated with the estimate. The method of defining the contingency is described in section 21.1.10
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 197
Indirect Cost Centre
Definition
Owners Cost
Costs cover training, IT systems (software), owner project team including their flights, accommodation and per diem whilst on EPCM or OEM visits, client administration personnel, any translations to local language and socioeconomic matters.
Field Indirect
Lump sum costs for items such as geotechnical works, test work and surveying. This could also include site visits by OEM and EPC contractors for bidding purposes during the EPCM tender process if not covered in the EPCM contract.
The costs factors have been applied to the direct costs to generate the indirect costs.
Table 21-8 - Indirect Cost Factors
Cost Centre Factor Comments
EPCM - Estimated – an hours allowance for high level design and supervision assistance is included
Owner's costs - Estimated by Woxna
Field indirect 1 % Considers brownfield site
Consultants 1 % Tailings consultants allowed for elsewhere
Insurance 0 % Assumed
Contingency 20 % Section 21.1.10
21.2.3 WORKING CAPITAL
Allowance has been made for the cost of the purchase of initial inventory and cost of operations until
revenue from product sale is received. 3 months of operational cost has been used to estimate this
figure.
In addition, allowance has been made for insurance spares and consumables on a factored basis.
21.2.4 DEFERRED AND SUSTAINING CAPITAL
There are a number of capital items that have been identified suitable to defer expenditure, or
required to sustain of operations during the LOM. These are summarised in the following table.
Table 21-9: Deferred Capital Investment
Cost Centre Total Year 4 Year 7 Year 13
Deferred Capital Investment 7.89 0.08 1.81 6.00
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 198
21.2.4.1 POWER LINE RELOCATION
As described in Section 16.9.2, the proposed pit shell narrowly crosses the path of the existing power
line to site. An allowance has been made in Year 4 to relocate a portion of this line so the mining
operation can advance.
21.2.4.2 TAILINGS EXPANSION
In Year 8, the TMF will reach its Stage 1 design capacity of 1.0 M t. Therefore, the Stage 2 expansion
will be completed in the summer of Year 7. Only the cost for preparation of the fill is included in the
capital estimate as it is assumed that the material will be sourced from and delivered by mining.
21.2.4.3 CLOSURE COST
An order of magnitude estimate has been prepared for the costs of closure of the mine and
associated infrastructure by Woxna. The estimate considers the following key elements:
Sealing of tailings and waste dumps, and covering of a protective layer. Material is
assumed to be locally sourced.
Demolition of the plant and permanent facilities. Rubble will be disposed of in the TMF and
the cost of demolition will be predominantly be covered by the sale of scrap metal.
Decommissioning of the open pit by treatment of pH and safety measures such as access
blocking and signage.
21.3 OPERATIONAL COST
The operational costs are those incurred during the full operation of the mining, process plant and
surrounding infrastructure for the duration of the operation. The operating costs are in reported SEK
since all operating costs are paid in local currency. As almost all constituents of operating cost are
borne in local currency, this is reflective of actual operations and allows for sensitivity of exchange
rate to be performed on the economic model (see Section 22.3). A USD conversion is shown for
clarity.
Unit operating costs have been based on the process plant operating as per Table 21-10.
Table 21-10: Operational Costs
Item Value Unit LoM USD/t ROM Ave
LoM USD/t Graphite Ave
Mining Cost
Ore 26.3 SEK/t ROM 25.8 240
Waste 27.1 SEK/t Waste
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 199
Item Value Unit LoM USD/t ROM Ave
LoM USD/t Graphite Ave
Fixed 800 000 SEK/a
Process Cost
Reagents and Consumables 12.6 SEK/t ROM 1.9 18
Labour 22 320 000 SEK/a 23.4 217
Grinding Media and Liners 12.1 SEK/t ROM 1.9 17
Power 26.3 SEK/t ROM 4.0 37
General & Administration costs 3 525 600 SEK/a 3.7 34
Fuel 27.3 SEK/t ROM 4.2 39
Maintenance 34.4 SEK/t ROM 5.3 49
Tailings Management 6.8 SEK/t ROM 1.0 10
Sales Cost
Transport 325.5 SEK/t product 5.4 50
Broker Fee (% fee / % traded) 7.5 % / 20 % 1.9 18
Total 78.5 730
For the nominal plant design, costs are calculated according to the nature in which they will be paid.
Some costs will be incurred equally irrespective of throughput and others will be borne only on
production tonnages (depended on recovery). Average values shows are based on LOM production
averages.
The proportions of each operating cost component are shown in Figure 21-1.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 200
Figure 21-1: Plant Operating Cost Proportions
The follow sections describe the methodology and information source for each component.
21.3.1 OPEX COST DEVELOPMENT
The following sections describe the development of the various operating cost components.
21.3.1.1 MINING OPERATING COST ESTIMATES
The mine operating costs (OPEX) were estimated by Golder from contractor quotes from mining
contractors received specifically for the Woxna Graphite Restart Project. Key contractor mining
operating costs are summarised in Table 21-11 for contractor mining fleet.
Due to the variable nature of waste and PEM ratios, the mining cost changes on a yearly basis, so
totals are based on a nominal strip ratio of 5:1.
Table 21-11: Summary of Contractor Operating Costs
Item Unit SEK Qty p/a SEK/Waste
tonne SEK/ROM
tonne SEK/t total
Overburden removal SEK/m3 36.5 0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Waste rock excavation SEK/t 27.1 500 000 27.1 135.5 22.6
PEM (ROM) excavation SEK/t 26.3 100 000 5.3 26.3 4.4
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 201
Item Unit SEK Qty p/a SEK/Waste
tonne SEK/ROM
tonne SEK/t total
Surveying, dewatering (Overburden) SEK/t 0.1 0.6 0.1
Roads SEK/mon 0.8 4.1 0.7
Lighting electricity SEK/mon 0.4 3.2 0.5
Lighting rental SEK/mon 0.4 1.8 0.3
Mine planning grade control SEK/a 1 000 000 1
Overburden has been included this cost with the waste rock excavation, from contractor
quotes
Waste rock excavation includes drilling, blasting, loading and hauling to waste dumps from
contractor quotes
PEM excavation includes drilling, blasting, loading and hauling to ROM pad from contractor
quotes
Dewatering is estimated by experience and surveying is not included
Allowance for road maintenance is estimated by experience and based on the equipment
hourly rate list provided by contractor.
Allowance for lighting power estimated from experience.
Cost provided by contractor for 4 lighting plants.
Woxna has included an allowance of SEK 1 M per year for mine planning and grade control
costs
21.3.1.2 REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLES
Reagent consumption rates for the process plant are taken from the mass balance, which has been
calculated using historical operating data, available test work or industry norms for a plant of this type
and size. The annual reagent consumption costs have been determined using calculated
consumption rates and prices per tonne of reagent based on database prices. Reagent costs are be
expressed as a SEK/t value and applied to the plant feed tonnage.
In addition to those related to wear and maintenance, the major consumable allowed for is product
bags, the cost of which is based on database figures.
21.3.1.3 LABOUR
The required personnel have been estimated by GBM in conjunction with Woxna Graphite. The
manpower requirements are outlined in the organisational chart (Figure 21-2). With consideration for
Swedish labour laws, to operate a under continuous conditions (24 / 7), 5 persons are required to
cover 1 position.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 202
Figure 21-2: Proposed Organisational Chart
For the PEA, the roles have been broken into 5 manpower rate categories based on the
organisational level of the role. The rate for each category has been Client supplied and is inclusive of
all benefits and represents the cost to the company.
Labour costs will be expressed as a SEK/a value applied against the operating period.
21.3.1.4 GRINDING MEDIA AND LINERS
Annual grinding media consumption is estimated using the rate of consumption in kilograms per
tonne, and the cost per tonne of grinding media. The rate of rod consumption is based Aminpro
(metallurgical test work provider) and compared with benchmarked rates.
Ceramic regrind media consumption and cost was supplied by Metso.
Annual costs of the liners for the mills have been calculated using the wear rates for each mill liner in
grams per tonne. These rates have been sourced from database figures. This rate is applied to the
plant feed tonnage and multiplied by the cost of liners in SEK/t.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 203
21.3.1.5 POWER
The electrical power operating costs have been estimated from the average power consumption
expected during normal plant operation. The average power consumption is determined by load
calculations at all project sites including the process plant, village and all infrastructure facilities. The
load calculation is based on estimated loads for the major equipment, and allowances for lighting and
small power. Reduced loads from duty/standby and intermittent motors are taken into account and
maximum demand diversity calculations are used to allow for the intermittent nature of the lighting
and small power loads. A summary of the power requirements of the plant is shown in Table 21-12.
Table 21-12: Summary Power Requirements
Item Values
Maximum Demand (kW) 2070
Average Power Demand (kW) 1340
Estimated site power factor 0.85
Largest motors to be started (kW) 350 (Rod Mill, VSD)
Existing Process Equipment Average Power Demand (kW) 477
Distribution Voltages on site (V) 400
The electrical consumption per annum is multiplied by a number of fixed and variable tariffs as
provided by Elektra, the local supply authority. At the average demands, the average cost of power is
0.50 SEK/kWh.
Equipment name plate kW’s have been used as the reference figures, however, as a large proportion
of the equipment was purchased second hand, the actual motors maybe larger than necessary and
hence the running loads of this equipment maybe overstated using the assumed factors.
21.3.1.6 TRANSPORT
The annual costs for the transport of product from site to Germany have been estimated using a rate
per trucked load, as determined through discussions with industry brokers. It has been assumed that
each truck has a 22 t load, providing a calculated rate in SEK/t.
Due to the graphite sale pricing assumption being under a ‘CIF European Port’ basis, Woxna has
conducted preliminary discussions with off takers, and believe a 30 EUR/t premium will be obtained
for delivered product. To simplify the additional revenue, a transport credit to the full transport cost
has been applied as part of the OPEX.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 204
21.3.1.7 GENERAL ADMINISTRATION
The yearly general administration costs including the process plant, mine and ancillaries were based
on predominantly Client input, which are heavily influenced by current and historical operational costs.
The GA cost is applied at a fixed rate (SEK/a), regardless of the feed tonnage of the plant, or amount
of product produced.
21.3.1.8 FUEL AND LUBRICANTS
Diesel consumption for the dryer is estimated using a rate of consumption in litres per tonne (L/t)
which is applied to the plant feed tonnage. The rate of consumption has been estimated from the
equipment manual.
Diesel consumption for the loader has been estimated using the rate of diesel consumption provided
by the supplier in SEK/h. This rate is applied to the equipment operating hours as estimated.
Lubricant consumption is included in the maintenance rate.
21.3.1.9 MAINTENANCE
The annual maintenance costs cover the repair and replacement of piping, electrical components and
cabling, hardware, general wear and tear and spare parts. The values are based on GBM experience
and are applied to the replacement cost of mechanical equipment installed in the plant. A slightly
higher maintenance cost allowance is made for the reused equipment.
Due to the limitations of the organisational structure proposed, also included in the maintenance costs
is allowance for contractors. This annual cost has been determined by estimating the hours required
for shutdowns, specialist works, electrical works and call outs. This requirement in h/a is multiplied by
the Client supplied contractor rate in SEK/h.
21.3.1.10 TAILINGS AND ENVIRONMENT
Environmental maintenance is made up of allowances for materials and consumables required for the
upkeep of the TMF and discharge of excess water to the environment. These costs have been
estimated by TCS and are expressed in SEK/a.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 205
SECTION 22 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
This report contains certain "forward-looking statements" and "forward-looking information" as defined
under applicable Canadian and U.S. securities laws. Forward-looking statements are based on
forecasts of future results, estimates of amounts not yet determinable and assumptions that, while
believed by management and the Consultant to be reasonable, are inherently subject to significant
business, economic and competitive uncertainties and contingencies.
The base case financial model prepared is a constant dollar type model which assumes the
purchasing power does not change with time. This means the cost of capital, operating costs and
revenue are constant through time in a like-for-like manner. A scenario analysis is undertaken to
assess the impact of time varying changes cost and revenue drivers.
METHODOLOGY 22.1
Table 22-1: Depreciation and Loss Parameters
Parameter Method
Asset depreciation method straight-line
Depreciation carry-forward infinite
Operating loss carry-forward Infinite
Parameter Value Unit
Fixed Plant, Equipment & Infrastructure 5 / 20 years / % per annum
Asset End-of-Life Salvage Value 0 USD
Table 22-2: Base case financial inputs
Description Value Unit Reference
Corporation tax rate 22 % Client
Discount rate 10 % Client
Finance rate 0 % A
Royalty rate 0 % Client *
Base currency code USD - Client
Base case graphite price 1 199 USD/t See § 19.6
A royalty rate of 0.2 % is commonly applicable to mining projects in Sweden, however as the mining
license was granted after 2005, Woxna have advised that no royalty is payable on the revenues from
Kringelgruvan nr1.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 206
GBM believes the depreciation and taxation methods are applied appropriately to this project. GBM
however are not accounting professionals and the post-tax economic performance should be taken as
a guide.
22.1.1 CARRIED FORWARD DEPRECIATION AND LOSSES
As Woxna Graphite have existing infrastructure and have operated historically, some depreciation
carry forward and historical losses have been incorporated into the economic model as summarised
in the following Table 22-3.
Table 22-3: Historical Book Assets
Item Value Unit
Operating Loss 2.75 M USD
Depreciation 3 years 0.20 M USD (total)
Depreciation 5 years 2.87 M USD (total)
Depreciation 20 years 2.87 M USD (total)
Total 8.70 M USD
22.2 ECONOMIC PERFORMANCE
The following sections describe the results of economic modelling for the production schedule under
the capital and operating cost, economic parameters as described in the relevant sections.
Table 22-4: Economics Summary
Parameter Value Unit
LOM 13.0 years
Average Sale Price 1 199 USD/t graphite
Revenue 121.5 USD/t ROM
1 130 USD/t graphite
OPEX 71.1 USD/t ROM
662 USD/t graphite
Cost of Sales 7.4 USD/t ROM
68 USD/t graphite
Margin 50.4 USD/t ROM
468.6 USD/t graphite
Payback Period 3.86 years
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 207
Parameter Value Unit
IRR 34.0%
NPV 26.61 M USD
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 208
22.3 DISCOUNTED CASH FLOW ANALYSIS
The full discounted cash flow schedule is shown below.
Table 22-5: Discounted Cash Flow Analysis
Item LoM Y 0 Y 1 Y 2 Y 3 Y 4 Y 5 Y 6 Y 7 Y 8 Y 9 Y 10 Y 11 Y 12 Y 13
CAPEX 24.62 16.72 - - - 0.08 - - 1.82 - - - - - 6.00
OPEX 135.1 - 7.76 10.54 11.20 11.52 11.59 11.29 11.35 11.37 11.13 11.37 9.34 9.20 7.38
Revenue 230.7 - 12.76 18.58 16.65 18.45 18.53 18.16 19.05 19.49 18.86 19.49 19.17 19.15 12.35
Sales 244.6 - 13.53 19.70 17.65 19.56 19.65 19.26 20.20 20.67 20.00 20.67 20.33 20.31 13.10
Cost of Sales 13.96 - 0.77 1.12 1.01 1.12 1.12 1.10 1.15 1.18 1.14 1.18 1.16 1.16 0.75
Annual Operating Income 95.63 - 5.00 8.04 5.45 6.92 6.94 6.87 7.69 8.12 7.73 8.12 9.83 9.94 4.97
Annual Depreciation Claimed 21.18 - 3.65 3.65 3.65 3.59 3.60 0.16 0.16 0.52 0.52 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.14
Annual depreciation allowance - - 3.65 3.65 3.65 3.59 3.60 0.16 0.16 0.52 0.52 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.14
Depreciation carry forward - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Working capital take out -2.38 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2.38
Taxable Operating Income 76.83 - 1.34 4.39 1.80 3.34 3.34 6.71 7.53 7.60 7.20 7.61 9.32 9.44 7.21
Taxes 16.30 - - 0.65 0.40 0.73 0.73 1.48 1.66 1.67 1.58 1.67 2.05 2.08 1.59
Corporations Tax 16.30 - - 0.65 0.40 0.73 0.73 1.48 1.66 1.67 1.58 1.67 2.05 2.08 1.59
Loss Carry Forward - 2.75 1.41 - - - - - - - - - - - -
Loss Carry Forward Claimed - - 1.34 1.41 - - - - - - - - - - -
Annual Post Tax Income 60.53 - 1.34 3.73 1.40 2.60 2.60 5.24 5.88 5.93 5.62 5.94 7.27 7.36 5.62
Annual Cash Income 81.71 - 5.00 7.38 5.05 6.19 6.21 5.40 6.04 6.45 6.14 6.45 7.78 7.87 5.76
Annual Cash Flow 57.09 -16.72 5.00 7.38 5.05 6.11 6.21 5.40 4.22 6.45 6.14 6.45 7.78 7.87 -0.24
Cumulative Cash Flow -16.72 -11.72 -4.34 0.72 6.83 13.03 18.43 22.65 29.10 35.24 41.68 49.46 57.33 57.09
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 209
22.4 SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS
A scenario analysis was conducted to estimate the magnitude of the sensitivity of the model as measured by NPV. The parameters utilised and results of the
analysis are described in Table 22-6. The sensitivities are show also graphically in Figure 22-1.
Table 22-6: Sensitivity Analysis Results
% Change Value NPV IRR % Change Value NPV (USD) IRR
Exchange Rate (SEK:USD) CAPEX (M USD)
70 % 4.58 394 002 8.4 % 70 % 11.7 32 182 639 49.5 %
80 % 5.23 11 624 751 20.3 % 80 % 13.4 30 326 762 43.1 %
90 % 5.89 20 021 702 28.3 % 90 % 15.0 28 470 885 38.1 %
100 % 6.54 26 615 008 34.0 % 100 % 16.7 26 615 008 34.0 %
110 % 7.19 32 009 531 38.4 % 110 % 18.4 24 759 131 30.5 %
120 % 7.85 36 498 331 42.0 % 120 % 20.1 22 903 254 27.5 %
130 % 8.50 40 292 041 44.9 % 130 % 21.7 21 047 377 25.0 %
Labour (M USD Avg) Fuel (M USD Avg)
70 % 2.39 32 473 631 39.1 % 70 % 19.1 27 657 102 34.8 %
80 % 2.73 30 520 757 37.4 % 80 % 21.8 27 309 738 34.5 %
90 % 3.07 28 567 882 35.7 % 90 % 24.6 26 962 373 34.2 %
100 % 3.41 26 615 008 34.0 % 100 % 27.3 26 615 008 34.0 %
110 % 3.75 24 662 134 32.2 % 110 % 30.0 26 267 643 33.7 %
120 % 4.10 22 709 260 30.5 % 120 % 32.7 25 920 279 33.4 %
130 % 4.44 20 756 385 28.8 % 120 % 32.7 25 920 279 33.4 %
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 210
Mining (USD/t ROM) Price (USD/t product)
70 % 18.1 32 979 398 39.1 % 70 % 839 -6 460 785 -0.1 %
80 % 20.6 30 857 935 37.4 % 80 % 959 4 994 425 13.7 %
90 % 23.2 28 736 471 35.7 % 90 % 1 079 15 938 007 24.7 %
100 % 25.8 26 615 008 34.0 % 100 % 1 199 26 615 008 34.0 %
110 % 28.4 24 493 545 32.2 % 110 % 1 319 37 283 748 42.6 %
120 % 31.0 22 372 081 30.4 % 120 % 1 439 47 934 355 50.8 %
130 % 33.5 20 250 618 28.5 % 130 % 1 558 58 584 191 58.7 %
Recovery (%)
80 % 9 720 410 18.6 %
85 % 15 071 553 23.9 %
90 % 20 327 644 28.6 %
96 % 26 615 008 34.0 %
98 % 28 710 796 35.7 %
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 211
Figure 22-1: Sensitivity Analysis
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 212
SECTION 23 ADJACENT PROPERTIES
There are no known operators of any relevant activities on directly adjacent properties or locally
adjacent properties.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 213
SECTION 24 OTHER RELEVANT DATA AND INFORMATION
24.1 EXECUTION SCHEDULE
Due to the small scale of the project and advanced nature of the infrastructure, and readiness of the
operating team at the existing site, project execution is expected to be comparatively rapid.
The following schedule presents an execution schedule indicative of the timing believed achievable
for the Woxna Restart Project.
Table 24-1: Indicative Execution Schedule
Whilst a winter construction period is limiting the advancement of tailings construction (and hence
places it on the critical path), it should be considered that engineering and procurement lead times
would prevent any significant improvement in the overall schedule beyond the 11 months shown.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 214
SECTION 25 INTERPRETATION AND CONCLUSIONS
25.1 MINERAL RESOURCE ESTIMATES
A Mineral Resource estimate, using an IDW interpolation method, was completed by Reed Leyton.
The Mineral Resource estimate in this Technical Report is reported using cut-off grades which are
deemed appropriate for the style of mineralization and the current state of the Mineral Resources.
Reed Leyton considers the estimated Mineral Resource to be in accordance with NI 43-101
Guidelines for Resource Estimates. Of importance for mine planning, the model accommodates in situ
and contact dilution but excludes mining dilution. Block size is similar (5 m x 25 m x 5 m) to expected
small-mining units conventionally used in this type of deposit, and appropriate for an open pit mine.
It is the opinion of Reed Leyton that the Mineral Resources estimates for Kringelgruvan satisfy the
definition of Mineral Resource as per the CIM Definition Standards of June 2011 (became law) or
November 27 2010 (published).
Potential for increasing of the Mineral Resources are good, with mineralization open down dip, which
requires further drilling to investigate potential.
25.2 MINING METHODS
The Kringelgruvan graphite deposit, located in Central Sweden, is at an advanced stage of
exploration. Drilling and geological resource block modelling to date has defined a resource that
forms the basis for the mining methods section of the preliminary economic analysis. The purpose of
this section of the PEA was to meet the scope of work as requested by Woxna.
Pit optimisation using Gemcom Whittle™ 4x optimisation industry standard software was completed
for Kringelgruvan deposit. The pit was analysed for optimal pit limits and economic sensitivity and
demonstrated that the deposit could be economically exploited based on the financial and operating
assumptions used in this study. The optimisations included only Measured and Indicated mineral
resources categories within the provided geological models.
The LOM schedules were prepared to support the preliminary economic evaluation of the potential of
Kringelgruvan deposit to develop into a feasible mine. If the preliminary economic analysis shows
encouraging cashflow further work is justified to proceed toward a pre-feasibility/feasibility study.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 215
25.3 METALLURGICAL TEST WORK AND PROCESSING
The test work performed by Aminpro, backed up by historical production data, has been used to
predict the production of graphite concentrates. Variability samples were also assessed by Aminpro
and exhibited little difference in processing kinetics.
There are significant CAPEX savings arising from utilising the existing supporting plant infrastructure.
Importantly however, the majority of the core processing units will be purchased new for the project.
This reduces process uncertainty, as the equipment can be specified ‘fit for purpose’ with test work to
support the purchase. The major plant units to be reused are the dryer and the rod mill, and both have
some flexibility in throughput.
25.3.1 EXISTING PLANT
The extent of the established plant infrastructure (particularly the supporting utilities) is a major
strength of the project. The success of recent operations at site involving reprocessing stockpiled
product further increases confidence in the adequacy of the legacy facilities.
Significant parts of the process critical parts of the plant utilise existing equipment. A refurbishment
program is planned and considerable work has been done on site by way of inspections to support
the costs reported.
25.4 ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE
The organisational structure proposed utilises a small crew on the day to day operations. Whist this is
not unique for operations this size, the low level of plant automation mean that the operators will be
required to be attentive to the whole plant operation. Failure to notice some processing anomalies
could impact graphite recovery for extended periods of time.
As the organisational structure has no maintenance personnel, operators will be required to maintain
as well as operate the plant where possible. Contract maintenance personnel will be used for major
maintenance.
25.5 TAILINGS REFURBISHMENT AND EXPANSION
The design proposed above is presented as an upstream dam, as this this design is approved under
the current permit and suits the existing dam wall construction. The present design is also the
cheapest one due to the fact that tailings are used as construction material. Hence there is no need
for a large amount of construction material for every expansion.
There are a number of other alternatives that may be more suitable to the operation under certain
circumstances. These include downstream dam, thickened tailings disposal or dry-stacked tailings.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 216
25.6 PRODUCTION AND GRAPHITE SALE
As the average sale price has been calculated through a combination of various product recovery
grades, sizes (ant their relative proportions) and research house prices, assessing product pricing for
graphite is more difficult than exchange traded commodities.
The production reports of a comparatively small volume of product from historical operations give
further credibility to the assessment of revenue.
25.7 INFRASTRUCTURE
The existing infrastructure at the mine site is a major strength of the project. Very little is required to
be constructed or refurbished in order to bring the mine and process plant back into production.
Those improvements that are proposed (such as the replacement transformer) will serve to improve
the reliability of the plant.
25.8 FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE
The financial performance of the base case indicates a positive performance of the project.
The total initial investment capital cost estimate for the required infrastructure, mining and mineral
processing is USD 16.7 M including contingency. The LOM capital cost estimate is USD 24.6 M
including contingency and closure cost.
Based on the capital investment and operating cost estimation the Project will yield an internal rate of
return (IRR) of 34.0 % and a net present value (NPV) of USD 26.6 M under the mine production
schedule proposed.
The project has been evaluated using a weighted average graphite sale price of 1 199 USD/t of
graphite sold from the Woxna process plant.
The operating costs have been estimated at a LOM average of 78.5 USD/t ROM, or
730 USD/t graphite sold.
Economic performance is most sensitive to price. The project is next sensitive to the US dollar to
Swedish krona exchange rate as revenue is indexed to the US dollar whist OPEX is borne in Swedish
krona.
This economic performance would typically be described as attractive and a signal that the Board
should consider the project for further investigation.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 217
25.9 RISKS AND OPPORTUNITIES
25.9.1 RISKS
The mine production schedule is aggressive with respect to the number of benches that are
mined per annum. This is being driven by the stripping ratio coupled with the need to release
graphite mineral. To achieve this sinking rate, bench heights may have to be increased which
could potentially create additional dilution and impact mining recovery;
The size and location of the waste storage area needs to be confirmed through a
geotechnical investigation. This activity should also assess the annual maximum lift heights,
the batter and final slope angles
Waste characterisation has not been completed and the extent of any acid problem is not
known.
The mine economics and financials are based on a set of conditions including prices and
costs that may change and adversely affect the commercial case for the project
No geotechnical stability analysis has been conducted on the pit design, waste dump stability
and foundation conditions. A geotechnical analysis should be conducted to determine safe
design parameters for these facilities as well as, the ultimate open pit slopes wall geometries.
Operating in severe winter conditions could affect the efficiency of the mining, crushing and
transport. The mine has operated in winter before and the historical production records do
not indicate that it was a problem to operate during the winter.
Commissioning of the flotation plant might take longer than anticipated to produce the
required concentrates. The flotation plant is sized for 155,000 t/a and hence there is excess
capacity to either allow for additional flotation time or to catch-up production. In addition, lower
grade concentrates could either be sold at the best price for that grade or recycled back to the
regrind and flotation circuits.
Failure of the existing, refurbished, equipment. Commission existing ball mill to replace rod
mill at lower throughput. Stockpile wet or dry concentrate until dryer or concentrate handling
plant repaired/replaced.
Whilst effort has been made to investigate critical items, there is some risk that the
refurbishment program will identify problems that the cost estimate did not allow for. In
addition to the CAPEX risk comes lead time risk, with certain components such as mill
gearing requiring manufacturing time in excess of the project execution timeline.
In addition to CAPEX risk, failures that might occur during start-up and operations present
potentially more serious implications. Due to the low operating margins, extended ramp-up
delays may result in cash flow problems.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 218
An 85 % availability has been assumed, which is lower than a usual mill process to
accommodate this however, the absence of an owner maintenance team and potential for
long outages could quickly bring the average plant availability below this number.
Several risks and opportunities have been identified in the preparation of this estimate as a
result of the estimating methods:
o The use of database costs may introduce errors or omissions in failing to allow for
site specific requirements.
o No allowances have been made for the event of a labour stand-down or other
significant interruptions to work.
o As this is a PEA level study the level of engineering is only sufficient to estimate the
costs to within ± 30 %.
25.9.2 OPPORTUNITIES
Owner operated mining operating and capital costs should be evaluated against the
contractor quotes to assess mine economics;
In-pit waste rock storage should be examined in greater detail;
Increasing the maximum depth of the open pit would increase the productive life of the
operation and increase the recovery of the known in-situ resources; and
A higher production rate would see better financial returns on the project, especially if the
mine is owner-operated rather than operated by mining contractors.
An existing mill could be used as a ball mill in the primary grinding circuit. This would allow an
increase in throughput and improve grinding efficiency. However, the limiting factor could be
the capacity of the dryer and bagging plant.
A tailings thickener could be used to improve water usage and potentially assist with tailings
disposal. Tests have been carried out and indicate that it should be possible to thicken the
tailings to approximately 65 % solids. The water would be recycled. Further tests are
required to assess high rate thickening. Additional assessment of the overall water balance of
the project is required.
It might be possible to coarsen the primary grind to produce a coarser graphite concentrate,
that is, greater than 300 µm. This product would have a premium on the 250 µm product.
Further test work is required to assess the possibility of producing a 300 µm concentrate at
94 % C, and the effect on the overall graphite recovery, flowsheet and economics.
The throughput could be increased by improving the plant availability from the estimated
85 %. This could be done by improving maintenance and hence reducing downtime of
equipment
Whist not currently permitted, processing strategies such as leaching to achieve synthetic
graphite have been shown in past to show some compatibility with the Woxna graphite
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 219
products. According to Industrial Minerals (14), the price is highly sensitive to very small
variations (that approach 99.95 % C) of the grade. As such, comprehensive testwork and
study would be required to justify a decision to pursue this processing strategy.
There are a number of other alternatives that may be more suitable to the operation under
certain circumstances. These include downstream dam, thickened tailings disposal or dry-
stacked tailings.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 220
SECTION 26 RECOMMENDATIONS
26.1 MINERAL RESOURCE AND RESERVE ESTIMATES
Even though no inferred resources are considered in this project, an in-fill drilling program to increase
the Mineral Resource confidence categorization of areas currently defined as Indicated to Measured
should be completed. Reed Leyton estimates an additional 3 000 m of in-fill and extensional drilling
would be recommended, tightening the drill spacing to 25 m sections and infilling some sections to
25 m spacing to confirm inter-hole continuity in and around faulted zones. Deep drilling to ascertain
the depth of the Kringel graphite is also recommended.
The following table presents some indicative costs for such work.
Table 26-1: Indicative Resource Development Costs
Follow Up Drilling Unit Price Cost (CAD)
15 x 200 m DDH on infill sections 120 CAD/m 360 000
1 x 300 m DDH 150 CAD/m 45 000
Geology, logging, core cutting, support 215 000
TOTAL 520 000
The deposit shape and surrounding areas show evidence of additional resources beyond those
defined. Further exploration work should be conducted to increase the size of the resource.
26.2 METALLURGICAL TEST WORK
If significant quantities (more than several kilograms) concentrate samples are required for marketing
purposes then a pilot plant is required. This will require several tonnes of bulk sample.
Test work needs to be carried out on neutralising acid rock drainage to enable optimising the design
of the neutralising circuit.
Neutralising test work is required on the water in the TMF to properly specify and design the process
and equipment for recycling the water to the plant.
It is believed a coarser concentrate, that is, greater than 300 µm, would improve the economics.
Further laboratory test work is required to assess the possibility of achieving the coarser concentrate.
The effect on grades and recoveries for all fractions needs to be assessed, as well as an appraisal of
the effect on the flowsheet and equipment sizing. A pilot plant test would be required to produce
coarser samples for marketing purposes under the new conditions.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 221
26.3 MINING
26.3.1 EXPLORATION RECOMMENDATIONS
It is recommended drilling to the extent necessary be conducted with a focus on upgrading the
Potential and Inferred Resources to the Indicated and Measured categories and evaluating additional
nearby exploration targets that could add mineral resources to the project.
26.3.2 MINE DESIGN AND PIT STABILITY GEOTECHNICAL STUDIES RECOMMENDATIONS
The pit limits are based on mineral resources reported by Reed (2013) however the pit design
incorporates limited geotechnical information regarding the rock strength or any structural
orientations. The pit walls were assumed at 55˚ for two benches and then 65˚ for the remaining
design for all the walls in both waste and mineralisation. To complete a design for preliminary
feasibility study additional geotechnical information needs to be gathered and analysed.
The following actions are recommended in order to increase confidence in the pit and other earthwork
geotechnical design parameters:
A campaign of bedrock exposure mapping and core logging with the sole purpose of
capturing the geotechnical properties of the rock masses in and around the pit designs;
The benches exposed by previous mining activities should be mapped and logged, to gather
data on the orientation and spatial distribution of the joint sets and faults, such data will form a
key component of the structural modelling and can be performed with minimal expenditure;
Develop a geotechnical model of the site to determine the pit wall structural sectors and to aid
in determining suitable sites for waste storage and other infrastructure;
Assess the blasted and fragmented rock properties to assist in developing the waste rock
storage facility designs and staging plans;
Determining the intact uniaxial and modulus of waste and graphite mineralisation material
through laboratory testing; and
During mining an observational method for fracture mapping especially for the tension
cracks should be used.
26.3.3 MINE PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS RECOMMENDATIONS
The proposed mine design and operation should be reassessed with the availability of the information
collected for geotechnical purposes outlined in the preceding section. Recommendations related to
the mine design and operations are as follows:
The mineral resources extend below the permitted depth of 65 m (below topography). Woxna
should apply for a new permit to mine deeper;
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 222
Woxna should apply for an increase in its mine production rate which is currently set at
100 000 t/a ROM to take advantage of economies of scale associated with the proposed
equipment fleet;
The size and location of the waste disposal area is limited by the available space within the
mining licence. Either the boundaries should be adjusted or the routes and roads within the
current site need to be adjusted to accommodate the storage area used in this study;
Woxna should arrange for the timely movement of the power lines in the western part of the
ultimate pit design; and
A single drill rig was selected that would be capable of keeping drilling operations well ahead
of loading operations.
26.4 PROCESSING
Detailed engineering design is required for installing the flotation cells, the regrind mills, the filtration
plant and the neutralising equipment. This can be started during the pilot plant stage (should it be
required).
Whilst investigation work has been completed to confirm the suitability of reuse of existing equipment,
as soon as project approval is received, work should commence immediately following process sign-
off on refurbishment to ensure no long lead time items affect the overall execution schedule.
As part of the flowsheet simplification, a number of mills are now excluded from the flow sheet, though
the condition of at least one of them is quite good. Considering the under-utilisation of the crushing
plant, utilising this mill for progressive grind would greatly increase the throughput of comminution
circuit. Flotation would require expansion, but the modular nature of flotation plants will make this
process relatively simple. Additional plates can be added to the concentrate filter. The most significant
cost of further expansion will likely be seen in the bagging area, with much of the equipment already
approaching its known or estimated maximum capacity.
26.5 ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE
The organisational structure is quite lean GBM believes there is little scope to reduce employee
levels. On the direct (operations) labour, it will be important to employ skilled or semi-skilled operators
(sometimes called technicians) to support the lack of dedicated maintenance personnel. This will
ensure plant availability is maximised where possible and reduce the cost of contract workers, which
at present are allowed for in the OPEX on a minimal basis.
Careful staff acquisition is therefore required in the process of building the team and a clear
understanding of what duties will be undertaken by each position should be defined prior to
employment.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 223
There is also some potential government assistance that can be gained that will lower the cost of
labour borne by the employer which should be investigated further.
26.6 TAILINGS
More geotechnical analysis is recommended to adequately asses the ground condition. This will
assist in verifying and optimising the design proposed, decrease cost over-run risk during
construction.
As part of design optimisation, further geohydrology investigations are needed in order to finalise the
design and to check if the upstream dam is a real alternative.
The desulphurisation of tailings should be investigated as it would be advantageous to use the tailings
as construction material. However this would require a separate impoundment for the sulphides and a
new permit.
If acid generation by the new tailings is considered significant then options for mitigating this will have
to be look at including floating off the sulphides from the scavenger tailings.
If thickening of the tailings is required then it is advised that laboratory tests are performed specifically
for high rate thickening either by vendors or by a laboratory acceptable to the vendors.
26.7 PRODUCTION AND GRAPHITE SALE
The results of testwork and the most recent prices available should be continually used to update the
forecast average price.
Whilst engagement with off-takers can be difficult, efforts to gauge actual prices should be continued.
Production of a bulk sample for analysis by off-takers will benefit this process.
Full analysis of the concentrates from the test work is required for marketing purposes.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 224
SECTION 27 REFERENCES
1. Aminpro Chile. Woxna Graphite Metallurgical Test work and Front End Engineering - Final. 2013.
2. Roskill Information Services Ltd. Natural & Synthetic Graphite: Global Industry Markets and
Outlook. London : s.n., 2012.
3. GBM Minerals Engineering Consultants. 0482-SPC-001 - Process Design Criteria. 2013.
4. —. 0482-SPC-002 - Project Design Basis. 2013.
5. —. 0482-CAL-002 - Mass Balance. 2013.
6. —. 0482-DTB-007 - Capex Database - Phase 1. 2013.
7. Golder Associates. TMF Capex and Opex - Stage 1, 2 and 3.
8. GBM Minerals Engineering Consultants. 0482-CAL-012 - OPEX Calculation. 2013.
9. —. 0482-DTB-006 - Mechanical Equipment List. 2013.
10. —. 0482-CAL-013 - Electrical Load List. 2013.
11. Golder Associates. Mining Methods: Preliminary Economic Analysis Woxna Graphite Restart
Project, 12512450160-R-Rev0. 2013.
12. InfoMine USA, Inc. Mining Cost Service. Spokane Valley, WA : s.n., 2011.
13. Peters, Max and Timmerhaus, Klaus. Plant Design and Economics for Chemical Engineers.
Singapore : McGraw Hill, 1991.
14. Industrial Minerals. Graphite Prices. Industrial Minerals. [Online] [Cited: 23 November 2012.]
www.indmin/prices/prices.
15. The Ontario Securities Commission. Repeal and replacement of National Instrument 43-101
Standards of Disclosure for Mineral Projects, Form 43-101F1 Technical Report, and Companion
Policy 43-101CP, Supplement to the OSC Bulletin, Dated April 8, 2011. Toronto : Published under
authority of the Commission by Carswell, a Thomson Reuters business., 2011. NI 43-101.
16. GBM Minerals Engineering Consultants. 0482-DTB-008 - Capex Database - Phase 2. 2013.
17. ReedLeyton Consulting. o Technical Report for Kringelgruvan Graphite Deposit, Part of The
Woxna Graphite Project, Central Sweden. 2012.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 225
18. Bonde, L. Registerblad - Område av riksintresse för naturvård i Gävleborgs län. Ovanåkers
kommun, Gävleborgs län, Sweden. . s.l. : Retrieved 05 24, 2013 from
http://www.lansstyrelsen.se/gavleborg/SiteCollectionDocuments/Sv/djur-och-natur/skyddad-
natur/riksintresse-naturvard/XN55%20%C3%96stermyroma.pdf, (1998, 11 16).
19. Heidbach, O., Tingay, M., Barth, A., & Reinecker, J. The World Stress Map database release
2008 doi:10.1594/GFZ.WSM.Rel2008. (2008).
20. kommun, O. (Ed.). Översiktsplan. Retrieved 05 24, 2013, from Edsbyn och Alfa, Ovanåkers
Kommun: http://www.ovanaker.se. (2012, 08 20).
21. Kuchta, M., & Hustrulid, W. A. Open pit mine planning & design. London: Taylor & Francis.
(2006).
22. Lawrence, R. W., & Scheske, M. A method to calculate the neutralization potential of mining
wastes. Environmental Geology, 32(2), 100-106. (1997).
23. Wyllie, D. C., & Mah, C. W. Rock slope engineering, (4th ed.). London: Institute of Mining and
Metallurgy. (2004).
24. Hoek, E. Practical Rock Engineering, http://www.rocscience.com/education/hoeks_corner. 2000.
25. Jacobsson, L. Borehole KFM01C. Uniaxial compression test of intact rock. Forsmark site
investigation, SKB P-06-69. 2007.
26. Stephansson, O. Rock Stress in the Fennoscandian Shield, in Comprehensive Rock Engineering
(ed. J.A. Hudsson), Pergamon Press, Oxford, Chapter 17, Vol. 3, pp. 445-59. 1993.
27. CostMine, Infomine USA Inc. Mine and Mill Equipment Costs. An Estimators Guide. .
28. Taxation of Cross-Border Mergers and Acquisitions. KPMG AB. Stockholm : KPMG, 2012.
29. Tailings Consultants Scandinavia. Kringelgruvan TMF - Data for PEA . 2013.
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 226
APPENDIX A LOM SCHEDULE
Preliminary Economic Analysis (PEA) - 0482-RPT-001 Rev 0
Page 227
CERTIFICATE OF QUALIFIED PERSON
CHRISTOPHER STINTON
As the individual who has co-authored or assisted in the preparation of Sections 1, 2, 3, 13, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26 and 27 of the Technical Report prepared for Flinders Resources Limited (the “Issuer”) entitled “Woxna Graphite Restart Project, Preliminary Economic Analysis” dated effective 11 October 2013 (the “Technical Report”), I hereby certify that:
I am a Senior Process Engineer of GBM Minerals Engineering Consultants Limited (“GBM”) of Regal House 70 London Road, Twickenham, Middlesex, TW1 3QS, England.
I am a graduate of Birmingham University of Birmingham, United Kingdom, with an Honours Bachelor of Science (Minerals Engineering).
I am a Member of the Institute of Materials, Minerals and Mining (CEng). I have worked as a Professional Engineer in the mining and minerals processing industry for a total of 34 years since my graduation. My relevant experience for the purpose of the Technical Report is metallurgy, process design and engineering, plant operations and management.
I have read the definition of “qualified person” set out in the National Instrument 43-101 (“NI-43-101”) and certify that by reason of my education, affiliation with a professional association (as defined in NI 43-101) and past relevant work experience, I fulfil the requirements to be a “qualified person” for the purposes of NI 43-101.
I have visited the Woxna Site in November 2012.
I have supervised the work carried out by other GBM professionals for GBM’s contribution to the Technical Report, and take responsibility for Sections 1, 2, 3, 13, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26 and 27 of the Technical Report.
I am independent of the Issuer applying the test set out in Section 1.5 of NI 43-101.
I have no prior involvement with the property that is subject of the Technical Report.
I have read NI 43-101, and the Technical Report has been prepared in compliance with NI 43-101 and Form 43-101F1.
To the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, the Technical Report contains all scientific and technical information that is required to be disclosed to make the Technical Report not misleading.
Dated this 11 October 2013
Original Document signed by Christopher Stinton, BSc, MIMMM, CEng
_____________________________ Christopher Stinton, BSc, MIMMM, CEng
CERTIFICATE OF QUALIFIED PERSON
GEOFFREY REED
As the individual who has authored or supervised the preparation of Sections 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 25.1 and 26.1 of the Technical Report prepared for Flinders Resources Limited (the “Issuer”) entitled “Woxna Graphite Restart Project, Preliminary Economic Analysis” dated effective 11 October 2013 (the “Technical Report”), I hereby certify that:
I am the Principal of ReedLeyton Consulting (“ReedLeyton”) of PO Box 6071, Dural, NSW, 2158, Australia.
I graduated with a degree in Geology with a Bachelor of Applied Science from the University of technology, Sydney, NSW, Australia, awarded in 1997.
I am a Member of the Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy since 1998. My relevant experience for the purpose of the Technical Report is drawn from working as a geologist for a total of over 15 years since my graduation from University
I have read the definition of “qualified person” set out in the National Instrument 43-101 (“NI-43-101”) and certify that by reason of my education, affiliation with a professional association (as defined in NI 43-101) and past relevant work experience, I fulfil the requirements to be a “qualified person” for the purposes of NI 43-101.
I have visited the Woxna Site on June 12 to 13 2012.
I have completed the work in contribution to the Technical Report, and take responsibility for Sections 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 25.1 and 26.1 of the Technical Report. My input is based in large part on examination of the material presented to me by Flinders Resources Limited during June 12, 2012 to October 20, 2012. First hand impressions about the style of mineralisation are based on examinations of drill core from representative drill holes during June 12 to 13, 2012.
I am independent of the Issuer applying the test set out in Section 1.5 of NI 43-101.
I have had prior involvement with the Property, namely, I am a “qualified person” responsible for the preparation of the technical report titled” Technical Report for the Kringelgruvan Graphite Deposit, Part of the Woxna Graphite Project, Central Sweden” dated November 2, 2012 (the “Previous Technical Report”) which is superseded and replaced by the Technical Report I have read NI 43-101, and the Technical Report has been prepared in compliance with NI 43-101 and Form 43-101F1.
To the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, the Technical Report contains all scientific and technical information that is required to be disclosed to make the Technical Report not misleading.
Dated this 11 October 2013
Original Document signed by Geoffrey Reed, B App Sc, MAusIMM
Geoffrey Reed, B App Sc, MAusIMM
CERTIFICATE OF QUALIFIED PERSON
BRYAN PULLMAN
As the individual who has co-authored or assisted in the preparation of Sections 15, 16, 25.2 and 26.3 of the Technical Report prepared for Flinders Resources Limited (the “Issuer”) entitled “Woxna Graphite Restart Project, Preliminary Economic Analysis” dated effective 11 October 2013 (the “Technical Report”), I hereby certify that:
I am a Senior Mining Engineer of Golder Associates (UK) Limited (“Golder”) of Cavendish House, Bourne End Business Park, Cores End Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5AS, UK
I am a graduate of Queen’s University of Kingston, Ontario, Canada, with a Bachelor of Science (Engineering) in Mining Engineering.
I am a Professional Member of the Association of Professional Engineers and Geoscientists of Alberta (APEGA) (P.Eng.). I have worked as a Professional Engineer in the mining and minerals processing industry for a total of 11 years since my graduation. My relevant experience for the purpose of the Technical Report is mine design and engineering, mine operations and management.
I have read the definition of “qualified person” set out in the National Instrument 43-101 (“NI-43-101”) and certify that by reason of my education, affiliation with a professional association (as defined in NI 43-101) and past relevant work experience, I fulfil the requirements to be a “qualified person” for the purposes of NI 43-101.
I have not visited the Woxna Site.
I have supervised the work carried out by other Golder professionals for the Golder contribution to the Technical Report, and take responsibility for Sections 15, 16, 25.2 and 26.3 of the Technical Report.
I am independent of the Issuer applying the test set out in Section 1.5 of NI 43-101.
I have no prior involvement with the property that is subject of the Technical Report.
I have read NI 43-101, and the Technical Report has been prepared in compliance with NI 43-101 and Form 43-101F1.
To the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, the Technical Report contains all scientific and technical information that is required to be disclosed to make the Technical Report not misleading.
Dated this 11 October 2013
Original Document signed by Bryan Pullman, B.Sc. (Eng.), P.Eng.
Bryan Pullman, B.Sc. (Eng.), P.Eng.
CERTIFICATE OF QUALIFIED PERSON
HENNING HOLMSTRÖM
As the individual who has authored or supervised the preparation of Sections 18.3 to 18.6, 25.5 and 26.6 of the Technical Report prepared for Flinders Resources Limited (the “Issuer”) entitled “Woxna Graphite Restart Project, Preliminary Economic Analysis” dated effective 11 October 2013 (the “Technical Report”), I hereby certify that:
I am the Director of Woxna Graphite AB of Skollallén 2B, Bollnäs Sweden.
I graduated with a degree in M.Sc. in Geotechnology from Luleå University of Technology, Sweden awarded in 1996 and a Ph.D in Applied Geology from Luleå University of Technology, Sweden awarded in 2000.
I am a Member of Australiasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy (MAuIMM no 308735) as well as the Australian Institute of Geoscientists (MAIG no 5628). My relevant experience for the purpose of the Technical Report is drawn from working as a engineer and environmental scientist (several roles and positions) for a total of over 17 years since my graduation from University.
I have read the definition of “qualified person” set out in the National Instrument 43-101 (“NI-43-101”) and certify that by reason of my education, affiliation with a professional association (as defined in NI 43-101) and past relevant work experience, I fulfil the requirements to be a “qualified person” for the purposes of NI 43-101.
I have visited the Woxna Site regularly between 2011-2013, most recently on September 3, 2013.
I have supervised the work carried out by Golders, TCS (Tailings Consultant Sweden) and SWECO (all contracted Swedish sub-consultants) for my contribution to the Technical Report, and take responsibility for Sections 18.3 to 18.6, 25.5 and 26.6 of the Technical Report.
I am not independent of the Issuer applying the test set out in Section 1.5 of NI 43-101.
I have prior involvement with the property that is subject of the Technical Report since I am the former Manager Environment and now a Director of the Swedish Company.
I have read NI 43-101, and the Technical Report has been prepared in compliance with NI 43-101 and Form 43-101F1.
To the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, the Technical Report contains all scientific and technical information that is required to be disclosed to make the Technical Report not misleading.
Dated this 11 October 2013
Original Document signed by Henning Holmström, M.Sc., Ph.D, MAusIMM, MAIG
Henning Holmström, M.Sc., Ph.D, MAusIMM, MAIG